Ms Quickstartguide

MicroStation V8 2004 Edition
QuickStart Guide
DAA035110-1/0001
Trademarks
AccuDraw, Bentley, the B Bentley logo, MDL, MicroStation and SmartLine are registered trademarks; PopSet and Raster Manager are trademarks; Bentley SELECT is a service mark of Bentley Systems, Incorporated or Bentley Software, Inc. Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Acrobat logo, Distiller, Exchange, and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Windows, Microsoft and Visual Basic are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc. Other brands and product names are the trademarks of their respective owners.
Copyrights
20012004 Bentley Systems, Incorporated. MicroStation 19982004 Bentley Systems, Incorporated. IGDS file formats 1981-1988 Intergraph Corporation. Intergraph Raster File Formats 1993 Intergraph Corporation. Portions 1992-1994 Summit Software Company. Portions 1992-1997 Spotlight Graphics, Inc. Portions 1993-1995 Criterion Software Ltd. and its licensors. Portions 1992-1998 Sun MicroSystems, Inc. Portions Unigraphics Solutions, Inc. lcc 1991-1995 by AT&T, Christopher W. Fraser, and David R. Hanson. All rights reserved. Portions 19971999 HMR, Inc. All rights reserved. Portions 19921997 STEP Tools, Inc. Sentry Spelling-Checker Engine 1993 Wintertree Software Inc. Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. All rights reserved.
MicroStation QuickStart Guide
ii MicroStation QuickStart Guide
About the Documentation

The MicroStation online help document contains all MicroStation user documentation. You can navigate within the help document by browsing, following hyperlinks, or entering search queries for indexed keywords, tool names, or text strings. You can switch between these techniques as often as you like.
In addition to the MicroStation help document, the following help documents are provided with MicroStation:
MicroStation BASIC Help MicroStation Visual Basic for Applications Help
For easy access to all provided help documents, use the desktop shortcuts in the program group MicroStation\Documentation.
For information about how to use help, open the MicroStation Help window (in MicroStation, choose Help > Contents) and select the help topic Using Online Help. If a link to that topic is not visible, click the Home icon in the Help windows tool bar to make the link visible.
Additional printed documentation for MicroStation can be purchased online from Bentleys Documentation Store (bookstore.bentley.com) or downloaded for free from Bentleys documentation Web site, docs.bentley.com. The downloadable versions are in PDF format and can be viewed and printed using Adobe Acrobat Reader version 4.0 or later, which can be downloaded for free from Adobe (www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readermain.html).
As you read through MicroStation documentation, you will encounter common engineering terms, as well as terms specific to this product. Important terms are bolded and defined where they first appear.
Before you begin to use MicroStation or its documentation, you should familiarize yourself with MicroStations basic operating principles and terminology:
Drawing tools and view controls are selected in tool boxes and view control bars; the name or description of the selected tool or view control displays in the status bar. Selection of a view control
iii
temporarily interrupts use of the selected tool. Settings are checked and adjusted, for the most part, in dialog boxes. Setting changes take effect immediately. Key-ins can be used to select any tool or view control, and to check and adjust most settings. Data points and tentative points are entered to specify graphic input. Upon placement in a model, elements (such as lines, arcs, and cones) can be manipulated or modified. Elements can be selected (with the Element Selection tool) before a manipulation or modification tool is selected, or identified after a tool is selected. An identified element is manipulated or modified only after it is accepted.
The following conventions and symbols are used in MicroStation documentation: 1. Point at means to position the screen pointer on top of the specified entity with the graphic input device (mouse or digitizing tablet). 2. Press or click means to press or tap the specified button on or with the graphic input device, as opposed to press (on) and hold down. 3. Drag means to press and hold down the specified button while moving the input device and screen pointer. 4. Keyboard keys and key combinations are enclosed with angle brackets, for example, Shift-Enter. 5. Alternate procedures are noted as Alternative Method. Alternate steps in a procedure are separated by or. 6. Type means to type a character string. 7. Key in means to type a character string and then press Enter (or Tab in modal dialog boxes). 8. The following syntax is used for keyed input:
Square brackets [ ] indicate optional data. Angle brackets < > indicate required data.
iv MicroStation QuickStart Guide
The pipe character ( | ) separates alternatives for the same data item. 9. The following icons are used to specify special information:
Icon Appears next to Note
Tip
Warning
10 . The following type styles are used to distinguish various text:
Tool and view control names MICROSTATION KEY-INS Keyed input to MicroStation Visual Basic commands Visual Basic code MicroStation BASIC commands MicroStation BASIC code Operating system-level commands and utilities Executable utility responses Keyed input to operating system Keyed input to executable utilities
vi MicroStation QuickStart Guide
Table of Contents
Part I: Getting Started 1. Whats New in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition?

AutoCAD Interoperability Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 AutoCAD 2004 support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Export DGN, DWG, DXF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 DWG/DXF file recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 DWG Audit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 DWG Open Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Advanced category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Line Weights category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Save As DWG/DXF Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Advanced category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 References category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Line Weights category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Entity Mapping category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Cells category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Fonts category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 TriForma category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 References tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Filter tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Printing Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 PDF support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Viewing and printing PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Levels and references in PDF files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Additional printing enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Print layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Print scaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Raster support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Pen table enhancements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Batch Print enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Pen definition options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 TrueType and SHX hardware font mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Integrated Feature Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Checking for Standards Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 MicroStation QuickStart Guide vii
Table of Contents
Level Enhancements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Multiple selection of targets in Level Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Linked trees between Level Manager and Level Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Right-click toggle of symbology overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Right-click menu for references in the tree of the Level Manager and Level Display dialog boxes . 120 Level Usage tab on the Level Properties dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Reworked support of nested attachment levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Edit Nested Attachment Levels configuration variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Loading Reference File Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Controlling display of newly created levels in References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Automatic Resynchronize Level Attribute of Reference & Library Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Level Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Optional flexibility for ByLevel symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Level key-in parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Clip Volume and Clip Mask view controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Composing Drawings as Sheet Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Multi-snaps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Reference Enhancements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 References dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 References hierarchy tree display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Information panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Copy Reference by Folding tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 References list box columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Slot numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Reference attachment with drag and drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Clip masking for references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Attach Reference tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Attaching multiple orientations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Default reference attachment preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Reference Logical Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Adjust Reference Colors dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Controlling color adjustments on Nested References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Update Sequence dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 REFERENCE RELOAD FORCED key-in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 MS_REF_CYCLECHECK configuration variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Turning off highlighting on reference manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Raster Manager Enhancements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Moving, rotating, and scaling raster references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Clipping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Enhanced 3D functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Raster Manager dialog box enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Enhanced attachment settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Enhanced raster reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Enhanced Raster Manager preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 viii MicroStation QuickStart Guide
Table of Contents
136 136 136 136 137 Text Style Enhancements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Optional hierarchy tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Preview Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Right-click options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Text Editing Enhancements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Shortcut for editing a text element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Tabs and indents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Dimensioning Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Dimension styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Dimension Audit utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Place Note Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Dimension Styles for Place Note. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Pop-up Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Windows File Selection Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Reminders to Save the Open File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Compression Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Expanded Drag-and-Drop Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Enhanced Pen Input Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Digital Rights Technologies Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Selectively enabling types of file protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Selectively enabling types of licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Unencrypting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Preventing file encryption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Multi-line Enhancements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Design History Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Patterning Enhancements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Selecting patterning methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Hole processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Interior shapes processing using the Flood method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Selecting pattern definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Modifying existing patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Visualization Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Enhanced Material System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Faster Creation of Particle-Traced Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Real-World Ray Tracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Define Light tool enhancements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Icons display on/off status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Editing multiple light sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Enhanced reference support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enhanced monochrome manipulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enhanced display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enhanced configuration variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reprojection capabilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ix
Table of Contents
151 151 152 152 152 Create Package Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Database Interface Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Oracle 9i support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Database linkage verification utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Miscellaneous Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Menu Changes for the 2004 Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 File menu changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Element menu changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Settings menu changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Tools menu changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Utilities menu changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Help menu changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Light source cells enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting tool tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying an image editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enhanced PhotoMatch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Whats New in MicroStation V8.1?

File Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Digital Signatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Named Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Quicksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Displaysets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Interoperability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Interoperability with AutoCAD 2004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Attaching references to levels in DWG files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Specifying XREF paths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Controlling DXF precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Specifying layer assignment for cells and reference attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Saving planar line strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Displaying invisible geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Enter data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Font naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Remapping fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Using AutoCAD commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Transition help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Other Enhancements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Level management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Copying levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Filter groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Deleting unused library levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 x MicroStation QuickStart Guide
Table of Contents
Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Display colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Live nesting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Extend tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Drop Element tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Pattern Area tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 OLE object support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Specifying page layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Text styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Dimension styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Dimension terminators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Managing raster files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Live nesting of raster references. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Raster references and 3D models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Bentley Descartes V8 output support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 GeoTIFF file support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 MrSID, Intergraph TIFF, and RLC file support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Save to JPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Design history. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Reference history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Adjusting revision numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Applying filtering to Save As operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Save 3D as 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Using multiple screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Unit specification for Parasolid XMT export. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Right-click pop-up menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 File list icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Esc key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Key-in window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Menu changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Level filter selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Raster Manager dialog box entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Interactive brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Piranesi EPix format support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Selecting light sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 OLE DB connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
xi
Table of Contents
3. Whats New in MicroStation V8.0?

Production Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 View groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Saved views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Reference attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Attaching references. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Merging references. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Exchanging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Reference display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Reference clipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Deleting reference clip masks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 References tool operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Copying reference attachments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Grouped reference attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Rotating references. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Scaling references. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Nested reference attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Reload All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 MS_OPENREFFILEFILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Placing elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Line strings, point curves, and shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Place Arc tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 AccuDraw Settings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Grid orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 AccuSnap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Locating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 PowerSelector tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Manipulating and modifying elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Move/Copy Parallel tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Scale tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Rotate tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Fence operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Change Element Attributes tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Cell-based symbology (ByCell) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Browsing cells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Placing cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Hatching and patterning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 xii MicroStation QuickStart Guide
Table of Contents
323 324 325 325 326 327 328 328 329 331 331 331 331 332 332 333 333 334 334 334 335 336 336 337 338 338 338 339 339 339 Interoperability Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Interoperability with DWG File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Open and save options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Batch Conversion utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Remapping design data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Operational Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Migrating v7 design files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Options for saving V8 DGN files as v7 design files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Setting up and using V7 workmode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Batch migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Setting up working units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Design History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Unlimited Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Batch Process utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 3D Modeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curves tool box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Curves tool box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Construct tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Modify tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Utility tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify Surfaces tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D tool operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apply Clip Volume To View view control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Related view attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disabling front and back view clipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Font system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Word processor-style text editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick Text Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spell checking preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engineering Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pen tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Batch printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Raster image processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Package wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DGN file cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiii
Table of Contents
Usability Enhancements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 DGN file preview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Automatically hiding the Tool Settings window (PopSet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Floating main menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Customizing the view control pop-up menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Showing and hiding tools and view controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 List boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Mouse preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 File menu changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Edit menu changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Element menu changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Settings menu changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Tools menu changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Utilities menu changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Window menu changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Help menu changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Miscellaneous usability enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Tree controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Fence usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Measuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Primary Tools and Attributes tool boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Selecting tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Status bar messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 DGN file properties and usage statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Key-in window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Visualization Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Particle tracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Persistent solutions and the rendering workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Render tool enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Material Editor enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Applying material definitions in attached references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Sky openings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Dynamic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Graphical Define North. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Animation motion blur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Solar time stamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Save Panorama . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Multi-pass anti-aliasing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Predefining light sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Usability enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 xiv MicroStation QuickStart Guide
Table of Contents
Other enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Raster File Management Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Visual Basic for Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 MicroStation V8 DGN File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
4. System Requirements
Installation Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Hardware and Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Output devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5. Directory Structure
The Home directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 The Documentation directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 The Program directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 The Workspace directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Sample project directory structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
6. Fundamentals
Starting MicroStation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Working with DGN Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Compressing the open DGN file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Saving and backing up your work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Save As and Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Recording Design History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610 Reviewing and modifying file properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 Using MicroStation Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 Merging DGN files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617 Exiting MicroStation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 MicroStation and Graphical Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 Graphical input with a mouse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620 Using a scrolling mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620 Graphical input with a digitizing tablet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622 Reassigning buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622 Using Drawing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 Borderless tool icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 Showing and hiding tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 Colored tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
xv
Table of Contents
626 629 629 631 633 633 634 634 637 637 638 Key-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640 Entering a key-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641 Finding and building a key-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642 Recalling key-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 Editing key-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 Preparing to Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644 Seed files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644 DGN design environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 Working units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647 Resolution setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 How working units are expressed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 Setting the Global Origin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649 Coordinate readout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649 Saving DGN file settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650 Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650 Creating models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651 Referencing models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 Cells and models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655 Importing and copying models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656 Deleting models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 Using Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 Using help in a networked environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 Working with tool boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Docking tool boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Docked tool box movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locating and selecting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with the selected tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Settings window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coping with mistakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7. Viewing Designs
Arranging View Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 View groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Using the resize borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Using View Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 View controls and workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Locating and selecting view controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710 View Control Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711 xvi MicroStation QuickStart Guide
Table of Contents
Update View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 Zoom In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 Zoom Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715 Window Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716 Fit View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718 Rotate View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 Pan View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 View Previous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723 View Next. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724 Alternatives to the View Control Bars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724 The View Control tool box alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725 The View Control pop-up menu alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725 Copy View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726 Align View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727 Setting View Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727 Selecting and controlling the display of a background image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728 Other view attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729 Using Saved Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
8. User Preferences
Setting User Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 General Procedure To set user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817 Line weight translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
Part II: Tutorial 9. Your First Session

Starting MicroStation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Using a drawing tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Placing line strings and circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Placing text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912 Getting help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913 Deleting elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916 Using key-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919 Saving a DGN file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920 Ending the session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
xvii
Table of Contents
10. Workflow Basics

Backing up a DGN file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Fitting the active model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Windowing areas of the model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Zooming and panning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Interrupting a drawing tool to use a view control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010
xviii MicroStation QuickStart Guide
Part I:
Getting Started
Whats New in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition?

MicroStation V8 2004 Edition sets the direction for the continued evolution of Bentleys V8 Generation products. This topic highlights the 2004 Edition enhancements to MicroStation. Version 5.5 of Microsoft Internet Explorer (IE) is required for normal operation of MicroStation V8. If you do not upgrade to v5.5 or later, the Word Processor Text Editor window may not function correctly. The editors V8 enhancements (see page 1-39) definitely will not work with earlier IE versions. To download the current version of IE, visit Microsofts Download Center (http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/search.aspx).
AutoCAD Interoperability Enhancements

MicroStation V8 2004 Edition substantively enhances interoperability with AutoCAD.
AutoCAD 2004 support

MicroStations support for AutoCAD file formats extends to the AutoCAD 2004 DWG format. In the 2004 Edition, you can open, edit, and save to AutoCAD 2004 files.
In addition, the 2004 Edition supports the following AutoCAD features:
Associative dimensions MicroStation supports associative dimensions in DWG files from AutoCAD 2002 and later releases. Within MicroStation, you can also create, edit, and save associative dimensions to DWG files. Layer filters MicroStation supports layer filters in DWG files from
11

Export DGN, DWG, DXF
AutoCAD 2000 and later releases. Within MicroStation, you can also create, edit, and save layer filters to DWG files. Layer filters are loaded when a DWG file is opened, and changes are written when the file is saved. Multi-line styles MicroStation supports multi-line styles in DWG files from AutoCAD v14 and later releases. Within MicroStation, you can also create, edit, and save multi-line styles to DWG files. Wipeout entities MicroStation supports wipeout entities in DWG files from AutoCAD 2000 and later releases. Within MicroStation, you can also display, edit, and save wipeout entities. Password-protected DWG files In MicroStation, you can open password-protected DWG files. When you try to open a password protected file, the Password dialog box prompts you to enter the password.
Export DGN, DWG, DXF

Choosing File > Export > DGN, DWG, DXF opens the Export File dialog box, which lets you save the current file to a different format. The dialog box is similar to the Save As dialog box.
After you save the output file, the current file remains open. This is different from File > Save As, which saves and opens the output file.
DWG/DXF file recovery

DWG or DXF files may contain inconsistent, corrupt, or lost data. In many cases, MicroStation can correct or ignore errors within a DWG/DXF file. For details, see Recovering corrupt or invalid DWG/DXF files.
DWG Audit
DWG Audit (Utilities > DWG > Audit) scans a DWG and/or DXF file, and generates a report on the number of objects audited and the number of errors found. If errors are found, an alert box asks if you would like to correct the errors.
12

DWG Open Options
To run DWG Audit without being prompted to fix errors, use the DWG AUDIT FIX key-in.
DWG Open Options

The DWG Open Options dialog box is redesigned. The options previously under the General and Advanced tabs are listed in an option menu under the Basic, Advanced, and Line Weights categories. The Advanced and Line Weights categories include new options.
The dialog box also contains these icons:
Open DWG Settings File lets you retrieve DWG Open and Save As settings from a DWG settings file (*.dws). Save DWG Settings File lets you save DWG Open and Save As settings to a DWG settings file (*.dws).
Advanced category
The Advanced DWG Open Options category includes these new options:
13

Save As DWG/DXF Options
Use Seed File Global Origin. If on, the DWG file uses the global origin from the DGN seed file. Set Axis Lock if OrthoMode =1. If on, if the AutoCAD ORTHOMODE system variable is set to 1 in the DWG file, the Axis Lock is turned on. Map Logical Names to XRef Block Names. If on, XRef block names are used for reference logical names. Display Units Alert. These options identify conditions that cause the DWG/DXF Units alert box to display.
Line Weights category

Prior to the 2004 Edition, DGN line weights were mapped to DWG line weights only through a linear mapping specified by the line weight scale factor. In the 2004 Edition, the DGN line weights can be individually mapped to DWG widths in either millimeters or inches. The same line weight mapping is used for both opening and saving to DWG.
The line weight scale setting has been removed, but if an existing V8 settings file is used with the 2004 Edition, the scale value is used to generate the initial map values.

The Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box is redesigned. The options previously under the General and Advanced tabs are combined on the General tab, along with many additional options, in nine subcategories.
The References tab (see page 1-7) and Filter tab (see page 1-8) also include additional options. The options under the Remap tab are unchanged.
The dialog box also contains these icons:
Open DWG Settings File lets you retrieve DWG Open and Save As
14

settings from a DWG settings file (*.dws). Save DWG Settings File lets you save DWG Open and Save As settings to a DWG settings file (*.dws).
Advanced category
The Advanced category includes these new options: Convert Empty Enter-Data Fields to Spaces if on, empty enter data fields within text are converted to space characters ( ). Set UCS from Current ACS if on, the AutoCAD UCS (User Coordinate System) is set from the current ACS (Auxiliary Coordinate System). Save Front and Back Clip Planes if on, the front and back clipping planes are set when a view in a DGN file is saved to DWG. Save Active Dimension Settings if on, the active dimension settings are saved to the DWG file. Force Positive Extrusion to Clockwise Arcs if on, a positive extrusion is maintained (and the arc direction reversed) when
15

saving clockwise arcs to DWG. PolyFace Mesh Tolerance Angle controls the accuracy of the approximation when elements are saved to polyface mesh entities. Application Data these options control whether non-displayable application data is saved to the DWG file.
References category
The References category includes this new option: Map Logical Names to XRef Block Names if on, MicroStation uses the reference logical names for XRef block names when the file is saved to DWG.
Line Weights category

Prior to the 2004 Edition, DGN line weights were mapped to DWG line weights only through a linear mapping specified by the line weight scale factor. In the 2004 Edition, the DGN line weights can be individually mapped to DWG widths in either millimeters or inches. The same line weight mapping is used for both opening and saving to DWG.
The line weight scale setting is removed, but if an existing V8 settings file is used with the 2004 Edition, the scale value is used to generate the initial map values.
Entity Mapping category

The Entity Mapping category includes these new options: Planar Line Strings these entities can map to Polyline or 3D Polyline entities. Nonplanar Line Strings these entities can map to Polyline and 3D Polyline entities. Flat Solids and Surfaces these entities can map to ACIS Entity,
16

References tab
Polyface Mesh, or Wireframe entities. Curved Solids and Surfaces these entities can map to ACIS Entity, Polyface Mesh, or Wireframe entities. Filled Elements, 2D Unfilled Elements, 3D Unfilled Elements these options map various types of filled or unfilled elements to Polyline, Polyface Mesh, Solid, Face, Region, or Hatch entities.
Cells category
The Cells category includes this new option: Create Block Entities with ByBlock Properties when cells are saved to blocks in the DWG file, these options set the properties for block entities (elements in a cell) to ByBlock. These options only apply if all block entities (elements) have the same value for a given property.
Fonts category
The Fonts category includes this new option: Text Style Name Template this option controls the default name setting for text styles.
TriForma category
The TriForma category includes this new option: Create Block Names from TriForma Part Family if on, the block names for TriForma components are assigned from the TriForma Family and Part name.
References tab
When saving to DGN or DWG/DXF files, the References tab
17

Filter tab
provides two new options:
Convert Reference Files If on, all files attached as references are converted to the selected format. For example, when saving to DWG, all attached references are also saved to DWG. If the master file is saved to a different directory, all references are also saved in that directory. If the master file is saved in the same directory, each reference is saved in its original directory. Allow Optimized Clip for Reference Merge if on, the surfaces, solids, and shapes are maintained when they are clipped during the merge process. If off, the surfaces and solids are dropped to their boundary/wireframe elements.
Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box, References tab
Filter tab
When saving to DGN or DWG/DXF files, the Filters tab provides two new options for saving frozen levels and tags to the output file.
18

Printing Enhancements
Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box, Filter tab
Printing Enhancements
One of the most significant enhancements in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition is support for generating output in PDF format. PDF (Portable Document Format), developed by Adobe, is an industry standard format for electronic publishing.
PDF support
A PDF printer driver is provided with MicroStation V8 2004 Edition. The file is named "pdf.plt", and it is installed in the Workspace\System\plotdrv directory.
You can use the Batch Print utility to generate a multiple-page PDF file with one page per file. In this case a bookmark is generated for each page by default. You can generate a single-page PDF representation of the open DGN file using the Print dialog box (File > Print).
You can edit the PDF printer driver to set the following options for PDF generation:
bookmark generation
19

PDF support
individual levels and references (see page 1-10) Engineering Links generation version of the PDF file format password protection
A special syntax applies to these options. It is not necessary to know the syntax, though: For each setting, or command, the PDF printer driver file contains a line for each of that commands possible values, or qualifiers. Selecting a different qualifier is a simple matter of moving a semi-colon (;), which causes the rest of a line to be ignored, from the beginning of one line to the beginning of another and saving the changes. Use a text editor to do this.
To select the PDF printer driver file

1. In the Printer and Paper Size section of the Print dialog box (File > Print), choose Bentley Driver from the option menu. or Click the Select Plotter Driver icon to the right of the option menu. The Select Printer Driver File dialog box opens. 2. If necessary, navigate to the Workspace\system\plotdrv directory. 3. Select the printer driver file pdf.plt. 4. Click OK.
Viewing and printing PDF files

To view and print PDF files, including those generated using MicroStations print driver, use the free application, Adobe Reader.
Levels and references in PDF files

If you select the FileOptionalContent option in the PDF printer driver before generating a PDF file, the levels and references will be individually viewable in
110

Additional printing enhancements
the Layers tab of Adobe Reader. To turn levels and references on and off, use the controls in the Layers tabs hierarchy listing; the technique is analogous to showing and hiding directories in Windows Explorer.
The master DGN file is listed by itself in the top level of the hierarchy listing. Listed on the second level are each directly attached reference, each level in the master file, and each raster image attached to the master file. The third level lists nested references and the levels and raster images for each directly attached reference. For example: Master DGN xxRef_1 xxxxRef_a xxxxxxRefs if any xxxxxxRef_a Levels xxxxxxRef_a Rasters xxxxxx... xxxxRef_1 Levels xxxxRef_1 Rasters xxRef_2 xxxxRefs if any xxxxRef_2 Levels xxxxRef_2 Rasters xxxx...
As you can see above, the number of levels in the hierarchy is determined by the depth to which references are nested. The bottom level lists levels and raster images for the most deeply nested reference(s).

The many printing enhancements in the 2004 Edition aside from PDF support are summarized in the following sections.
In many cases configuration variables exist that enable you to customize printing capabilities and even to completely negate the 2004 Edition printing enhancements. To review descriptions of these configuration variables and to set the variables, select the Printing category in the Configuration dialog box (Workspace > Configuration).
111

Print layout
Print layout capabilities are significantly enhanced in the 2004 Edition. The workflow for specifying the area to print is as follows: 1. From the Area option menu in the Print dialog box (File > Print), choose the type of area to print view, fence, the entire active model, the entire active model and its attached references, or, if the active model is a sheet model (see page 1-24), the area defined by the sheet boundaries. 2 . From the View option menu, choose the View containing the area to print. If the active model is a sheet model, the print is automatically oriented parallel to the view x-axis.
Following are also among the most significant print layout enhancements: The print is not automatically maximized when you select a new view or fence to print or change the paper size settings. By default, the prints rotation and orientation are automatically optimized. If the selected printer driver contains a rotate=none record, it has the same effect as rotate=cw.
Print scaling
The configuration variable MS_PLT_SCALE_METHOD can be used to set the default method by which the print scale is specified in the Print Scale and Size section of the Print dialog box and in the Scale Assistant dialog box. If MS_PLT_SCALE_METHOD is set to 1, the default scaling method is paper-to-design. If MS_PLT_SCALE_METHOD is set to 2, the default scaling method is design-to-paper.
If you do not set the configuration variable, the default is the Method setting in the Scale Assistant dialog box.
If the configuration variable is set, it overrides the Method setting. In this case you
112

can change that setting, but the change remains in effect only until you choose File > Exit in the Print dialog box. However, if you merely close the dialog box window without choosing File > Exit the new Method setting remains in effect.
Raster support
Many raster printing settings, such as quality, brightness, and contrast, can be accessed directly in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition, thus eliminating the necessity to modify a printer driver to apply settings particular to a single print.
To access these settings, choose Settings > Raster Options in the Print dialog box (File > Print). Doing this opens the Raster Options dialog box. Changing these settings does not affect the selected printer driver file. Changes are valid only for the current print.
Pen table enhancements

Pen table-related functionality is enhanced in the 2004 Edition as follows:
113

You have the option to define pen maps within pen tables. Using pen maps, you can apply color and width resymbolization on a per-stroke basis to your prints. This is the only way to achieve some results, such as screened multi-color associative patterns and custom line styles. When an AutoCAD CTB plot style table is imported, MicroStation V8 2004 Edition automatically creates a pen map from the CTB plot style tables color-to-width mappings. You can also export a pen map list to an AutoCAD CTB file. The Text Substitutions dialog box has items in its Edit menu for inserting the sheet name, sheet size, model name, saved date, and short scale factor. There is a submenu for inserting document set variables published from the Batch Print utility.
Batch Print enhancements

The Batch Print utility is enhanced for the 2004 Edition to provide additional flexibility in building job sets. Here are some of the more significant enhancements: You can derive Print Area specifications from a sheet model (see page 1-24) definition. This method of specifying a print area is recommended. To set the default Print Area specification to use sheets, open the Print Area Specification Properties dialog box and from the Method options menu, choose Sheet. For each print, the Batch Print dialog box identifies both the model as well as the file. You can drag-and-drop filenames from Windows Explorer and models from the Models dialog box in MicroStation to create new prints in your job set. You can also drag-and-drop in the list box in the Batch Print dialog box to change the order of prints in your job set. When you add a DGN file to the job set, the utility automatically adds one entry per model in the file. You have the option to set the vector color mode monochrome, gray-scale, or color in a display specification. If the PDF printer driver is selected, the utility enables the printing specification option of printing a document set to a single file. If you select this option, you can specify the name of the file. If you do not specify a filename, the utility assigns the filename of the
114

DGN file in the first print in the job set. While defining a print specification for a print to a file, you can easily include the model name in the output print file by inserting the string %m in the Print Filename Format dialog box.
Pen definition options

There are new options in the 2004 Edition for defining pens in printer drivers. You can assign screening to pen definitions. This is an alternative to using pen tables to achieve print screening and permits screening on a per stroke basis instead of per element. The PEN record syntax for assigning screening is as follows:
weights, or levels) /SCREEN=<value 0.0 and 100.0>
xxxxxxpen(pen_number)=(colors, xxxxxxbetween
As with pen table screening, 100.0 indicates no screening and 0.0 results in pure white. In addition, it is now possible to define gray-scale pen definitions without explicitly specifying the RGB color components. The PEN record syntax for doing this is as follows:
xxxxxxpen(pen_number)=(colors, weights, or levels) /GRAYSCALE
TrueType and SHX hardware font mapping

Hardware font mapping is supported for TrueType and SHX fonts with both the Windows system printer driver and the Bentley PostScript printer drivers. The FONT record syntax for specifying hardware font mapping is as follows:
FONT("fontName")=("<font name | ALL TTF | ALL SHX>") [/Kern=<n>] [/Sizeratio=<m>]
TTF denotes TrueType fonts. The quotation marks must be included. The order in which ALL TTF, ALL SHX, and font name mappings are
115

Integrated Feature Modeling
specified in a printer driver file is insignificant. Individual font mappings override ALL TTF and ALL SHX mappings.
Feature modeling is a specific type of 3D modeling used to create and modify complex 3D geometry in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition. Feature Modeling creates feature solids which can be easily modified after they are constructed by editing specific defining parameters for the solid. This quality makes feature solids more flexible and powerful in comparison to SmartSolids.
For compatibility with previous editions; feature solids are seen by applications as SmartSolids without requiring additional changes.
Primitive Solid tools The tools in the Primitive Feature Solids tool box are used to place simple 3D parametric solids slab, sphere, cylinder, cone, torus, or wedge.
Boolean tools the Boolean Features tool box contains tools for constructing parametric solids by uniting, intersecting, or subtracting existing solids. With each tool you can perform multiple operations without the need to accept each before selecting another solid.
Profile tools the Profile Feature Solids tool box contains tools for creating parametric solids from existing profile elements.
116

Modify Face tools the Modify Face Features tool box contains tools that let you taper, extend, spin, remove, or replace faces of a solid
Feature tools the tools in the Features tool box are used to add features to a solid. Complex designs can be created by starting with a basic solid to which you add the features required to finish it.
Manipulate Feature tools the tools in the Manipulate Feature tool box are used to manipulate most features holes, circular bosses, cuts, protrusions, or ribs.
Modify Feature tools the tools in the Modify Feature tool box are used to modify features or profiles of existing solids. When modifying features or profiles, dialog boxes let you edit the parameters that were used initially to create the feature or profile of the solid.
The Place Feature Cell tool enables you to place a DGN model much like a cell and resolve variables in the feature model at placement time. You first create a feature solid in terms of global variables, then define named sets of the variables, and then select them by name at placement.
117

global variables The Feature Manager Global Variables dialog box is used to manage global variables used with parametric feature-based models created with the feature modeling tools. This dialog box opens when the Feature Modeling Variables icon is selected in the Feature Modeling Primary tool box, or when Element > Feature Modeling > Variables is chosen.
Feature Manager this window is used to select and manage features used in creating a solid. This dialog box opens when the Feature Modeling Feature Manager icon is selected in the Feature Modeling Primary tool box, or when Element > Feature Modeling > Feature Manager is chosen.
When you identify a solid, with the Feature Manager window open, the feature tree for the solid displays in the Feature Manager window. Features are displayed in the order that they were placed, with the first feature at the bottom of the list. Branches on the feature tree can be expanded by clicking the (+) icon, or collapsed by clicking the (-) icon.
118

Checking for Standards Compliance
Checking for Standards Compliance

MicroStation V8 2004 Edition introduces a utility, Standards Checker, that enables you to check DGN files for compliance with pre-defined standards.
The utility has the capability to check compliance with standards for usage of the following:
levels dimension styles text styles line styles
You can run batch checks of multiple files and directories using the Batch Process dialog box (Utilities > Batch Process).
Level Enhancements
There are many enhancements to the level system in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition.
119

Multiple selection of targets in Level Manager
Multiple selection of targets in Level Manager

You can select multiple design files and/or reference attachments from the tree in the Level Manager by holding the left mouse button down and dragging the pointer over the desired files. The levels for all the selected files display in the level list.
Linked trees between Level Manager and Level Display

The Link Tree Selection property allows you to link together the actions of the Level Manager and the Level Display dialog boxes. When this property is turned on, any target file(s) selected in the tree in Level Manager are also selected in Level Display and vice versa.
Right-click toggle of symbology overrides

With the addition of the multiple selection of target file(s) comes the ability to override symbology on levels that exist in multiple files. For example, suppose you have several files that have a level called Border and elements on that level appear in a different color in each file. You can change the color symbology once and the color will be changed in all of the selected files.
Right-click menu for references in the tree of the Level Manager and Level Display dialog boxes
Open Dialog Opens the References dialog box. Attach Opens the Attach Reference dialog box to attach references. Detach Detaches the selected reference attachment(s). Display Toggles the Display setting of the selected references. Snap Toggles the Snap setting of the selected references. Locate Toggles the Locate setting of the selected references. Select All Selects all attached references. Select None Deselects all attached references. Invert Selection Inverts the selection of references.
120

Level Usage tab on the Level Properties dialog box
Level Usage tab on the Level Properties dialog box

A tab has been added to the Level Properties dialog box that provides information on where the level is used and an element count for each type of element that occurs in the level.
Reworked support of nested attachment levels

In pre-2004 editions of MicroStation V8 if the same nested reference attachment existed more than once in a file, possibly though varying parent attachments, the attributes of the nested file would be uniform with regard to the first instance of a parent attachment containing the nested attachment as defined by the Update Sequence.
Therefore, if "c.dgn" is a nested attachment in "a.dgn" and "c.dgn" is attached once through "b.dgn", once through "d.dgn" and once through "e.dgn", the attributes of "c.dgn" are based upon how "c.dgn" appears when viewed through "b.dgn" (assuming the Update Sequence corresponds with the alphabetical list of parent attachments). That is, if "b.dgn" was opened and the ByLevelColor of "c.dgn" were changed, "c.dgn"s appearance in "a.dgn" would become uniform based upon that change.
However, if "e.dgn" was opened and the ByLevelColor of "c.dgn" were changed, "c.dgn"s appearance would not change because "c.dgn" through "b.dgn" did not change. That is, "e.dgn" is at a lower position in the Update Sequence than is "b.dgn"
Starting with MicroStation V8 2004 Edition, the nested attachment will not necessarily remain uniform. Using the example above, if the ByLevelColor of "c.dgn" was changed though "b.dgn", "d.dgn" and "e.dgn" each nested attachment would reflect each individual change through "a.dgn" and not be uniform with respect to the appearance of "c.dgn" through "b.dgn".
However, if "b.dgn" was attached twice, the change to "c.dgn" through "b.dgn" would propagate to both instances. This is regardless of whether the parent attachment containing the nested attachment is itself nested into another file. That is, the uniformity is based upon path to the nested attachment through the parent, not file to which the parent is attached.
121

Edit Nested Attachment Levels configuration variable
Edit Nested Attachment Levels configuration variable

Setting the configuration variable MS_LEVEL_EDIT_NESTED_ATTACHMENT_LEVELS lets you edit the attributes of levels in nested reference attachments.
Loading Reference File Filters

Setting, the configuration variable MS_LEVEL_LOAD_ATTACHMENT_FILTERS causes level filters of reference attachments to load when the master file is opened. For every unique attachment by file, a top-level filter is created. This top-level filter represents the reference attachment. All filters of the reference attachment are loaded as children of this new top-level filter. The reference filters may be modified in the context of the current session. These changes are not savable in the DGN file.
Controlling display of newly created levels in References

Setting the configuration variable MS_REF_NEWLEVELDISPLAY causes MicroStation to display newly created levels in references. By default, when new levels are created in a model that is referenced by another model, the new levels are not displayed when the referencing model is opened. Newly created levels are considered new until File > Save Settings is chosen. This functionality only works when both the master file and referenced files are in the V8 DGN file format (see page 3-69).
Automatic Resynchronize Level Attribute of Reference & Library Levels

The configuration variable MS_LEVEL_AUTO_SYNC_ATTRIBUTE_LIST can be set so level attributes (as specified in the variable) of library and reference levels are automatically resynchronized on file open. Library levels are synchronized from the level library. Reference levels are synchronized from their source file.
Level Purge
The LEVEL PURGE key-in lets you delete a level that contains elements. Elements are moved to the Default level unless a destination level is specified.
122

Optional flexibility for ByLevel symbology
Optional flexibility for ByLevel symbology

It is possible to enforce the use of ByLevel symbology yet enable the changing of individual element symbologies as needed. Operating MicroStation with the MDL application SYNCHBYLEVEL loaded causes the active color, active line style, and active line weight to reset to ByLevel each time the active level changes. To cause SYNCHBYLEVEL to automatically load each time you open a DGN file, designate SYNCHBYLEVEL as a design application in the Design Applications category of the Configuration dialog box (Workspace > Configuration).
Level key-in parameters

For the level specification parameter within level key-ins, you can specify:
multiple levels as well as single levels. reference attachment levels as well as master file levels.
Clip Volume and Clip Mask view controls

The Clip Mask view control has been added to the View Control tool box. Like the Clip Volume view control, the Clip Mask view control restricts the display of elements in a view. Whereas Clip Volume lets you define the volume of the view that you want displayed, Clip Mask lets you mask a volume from display.
Clip masks may be applied to a volume inside a clip volume. In this case only those elements will display that are located within the clip volume, but outside the clip mask.
Clip Volume (left) and Clip Mask (right) settings.

Both view controls include an icon or button bar menu to let you quickly access their various options. Clip volumes and clip masks can be defined by:
Element including solids (other than feature solids) or closed extrusions, cylinders, or closed planar elements (shapes, circles,
123

Composing Drawings as Sheet Models
ellipses, complex shapes, grouped holes). 2 points define a rectangular shape graphically with two points. Polygon define a polygon shape graphically. Element Range the volume to the range of the selected element(s).
Selecting the Show or Hide Clip Volume/Mask Element icon toggles the display of clipping elements. When they are displayed, you can use normal tools to modify them with the view updating to reflect the new clip volume, or clip mask.
You can toggle the display of clip volumes and clip masks in a view by adjusting the Clip Volume setting in the View Attributes dialog box. Clip Volume is a replacement for Apply Clip Volume To View.
Composing Drawings as Sheet Models

In MicroStation V8 2004 Edition, a sheet is analogous to a rectangular piece of paper. A sheet is contained in a sheet model.
You can compose a drawing on a sheet using either or both of the following methods:
attaching saved views of a design model to the sheet model as references drawing and annotating directly in the sheet model
In either case you define the sheets dimensions, borders, and title block. You also set the scale factors applied to the geometry and annotations in the model itself as well as the physical scale at which the sheet is printed relative to the selected paper size.
Multi-snaps
There are three multiple snap modes or multi-snaps provided for your use with AccuSnap and tentative point snapping in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition. The
124

Reference Enhancements
multi-snaps are numbered multi-snap 1, multi-snap 2, and multi-snap 3.
Unlike an ordinary snap mode, a multi-snap is an ordered list of other snaps. When a multi-snap is active and you move the pointer near an element with AccuSnap enabled or you enter a tentative point, MicroStation sequentially processes the list of snaps defined for that multi-snap.
Reference Enhancements
MicroStation V8 2004 Edition includes several enhancements that make it easier to manage and attach references.
References dialog box

Enhancements to the References dialog box include:
a nested references tree an information panel that displays reference settings the Copy/Fold Reference tool additional columns in the list box ability to edit slot numbers
125

References hierarchy tree display

The References dialog box includes a tree that displays the hierarchy of reference attachments. The Show Hierarchy icon toggles on and off the tree display.
Show Hierarchy icon and references tree
When Show Hierarchy is on, the tree shows the active model and the references that are directly attached to it. Nested references (references attached to other references) can be expanded. When you select a nested reference, the reference
126

list box shows only the references that are attached to the selected reference.
When the tree is turned off to save screen space, you can use the arrow button next to the Show Hierarchy icon to list the master file and any nested references that are attached to it. As with the tree, if you choose one of the nested references, the reference list box displays only the nested references that are attached to the chosen reference.
Information panel
The References dialog box includes an information panel that displays and controls the attachment settings for a selected reference.
References information panel

Many of the settings are represented by icons. If the icon is pressed, the setting is on. Click the icons to toggle on or off the settings.
If you select multiple references that have different settings, the icons representing different settings are shaded. For example, if True Scale is enabled for one selected reference and disabled for another, the True Scale icon is shaded.
Copy Reference by Folding tool

The Copy Reference by Folding tool lets you more easily attach references that show a model from orthogonal angles, with all views correctly aligned.
127

Reference attachment with drag and drop
References list box columns

The References dialog boxs list box uses icons as titles for the Display, Snap, and Locate columns. Icons are also used as titles for these new columns that display the attachment settings for the references: True Scale Scale Line Styles Clip Back Clip Front Display Raster References Ignore Attachment When Live Nesting Use Lights
The Display, Snap, and Locate columns display by default. To display the new columns, right-click on the row of column titles. From the menu, choose the columns to display.
References list box columns
Slot numbers
In the References list box, the Slot column lists a unique number for each reference. To edit a slot number, slowly double-click on it, then key in a new number. If you key in a slot number that is used by another reference, the slot numbers are exchanged.
Reference attachment with drag and drop

You can drag and drop reference attachments into the References dialog box from two sources:
128

Clip masking for references
Windows Explorer you can select DGN, DWG, or other types of files in a Windows Explorer window, then drag and drop them into the list box in the References dialog box. Models dialog box you can select models in the Models dialog box (in the current session or another MicroStation session), then drag and drop them into the list box in the References dialog box.
Once the attachments are added to the References dialog box, the Attach Source Files dialog box opens.
This dialog box lets you choose the method for attaching the file: Interactive, Coincident, Coincident World, or a view. The Interactive option opens the Reference Attachment Settings dialog box.
Clip masking for references

In the 2004 Edition, you can clip a reference using an element as a boundary and mask the same reference using a fence. Previous editions did not support combining these two techniques on a single reference.
Attach Reference tool

The Attach References dialog box includes the Attachment Method options menu, which lets you select the view of the model being attached.
129

Attach Reference tool
The default setting is Interactive, which opens the Reference Attachment Settings dialog box. If you select multiple files and set the attachment method to Interactive, the Reference Attachment Settings dialog box opens for each file.
If you choose either Coincident or Coincident - World, MicroStation attaches the reference to the model coincidentally using the default attachment settings or attachment settings of the last reference attached. The Reference Attachment Settings dialog box does not open.
If you choose one of the remaining orientation settings (Top, Right, Front, Isometric, Bottom, Back, Left, or Right Isometric), MicroStation also uses the default (or most recent) attachment settings. You must enter a data point to position each reference.
Attaching multiple orientations

In the Reference Attachment Settings dialog box, you can select multiple views in the Orientation list box. If you select multiple orientations, MicroStation prompts you to enter data points to position the references. (The Coincident and Coincident World options do not require a data point.)
130

Default reference attachment preferences
Default reference attachment preferences

Default reference attachment preferences can be specified in two ways:
The default user preferences are set in the References category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences). The configuration variable MS_REF_DEFAULTSETTINGS sets the default reference attachment settings for all users.
Reference Logical Name

The Reference Attachment Settings dialog box, Logical Name field uses the default reference logical name if it exists. If not, it uses the view (orientation) name.
The default reference logical name is defined in the new Ref Logical field in the Model Properties dialog box.
Adjust Reference Colors dialog box

The Adjust Reference Colors dialog box lets you set the hue, as well as adjust value and saturation.
131

Controlling color adjustments on Nested References
You can use the same color for all elements in a reference by turning on both Fixed and Hue Fixed for All Colors. You can then use the Hue slider to adjust the color.
Controlling color adjustments on Nested References

Setting the configuration variable MS_NEST_COLORADJUSTMENT specifies the multiplier applied to the nested reference color adjustments at each level. If not set, the color adjustment for the top level reference controls the color adjustment for all nested references.
Update Sequence dialog box

In the Update Sequence dialog box, to change the position of a reference file in the sequence, you can:
drag the file to a new position Click the arrow buttons to change the files position
132

REFERENCE RELOAD FORCED key-in
REFERENCE RELOAD FORCED key-in

The REFERENCE RELOAD FORCED key-in forces a reload of a reference.
In contrast, the Reload Reference tool checks the size and timestamp of the file that contains the referenced model and reloads the reference only if these have changed.
MS_REF_CYCLECHECK
configuration variable
Setting the configuration variable MS_REF_CYCLECHECK to 0 causesMicroStation to skip the circular reference check for DGN files. This configuration variable does not affect DWG files.
Turning off highlighting on reference manipulation

By default, MicroStation highlights all elements in a reference when the reference is manipulated. Setting the configuration variable MS_REF_DONTHILITEFORMANIP disables highlighting. Disabling speeds up the reference manipulations but makes it more difficult to see which references are being manipulated.
133

Raster Manager Enhancements
Raster Manager Enhancements

There are enhancements to raster references functionality in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition.
Moving, rotating, and scaling raster references

The 2004 Edition extends raster reference manipulation capabilities with the addition of the following tools:
Move Raster
Rotate Raster
Scale Raster
These tools are in the Raster Control tool box.
Clipping
Closed B-spline curve have been added as a valid element to define a raster clipping boundary or clipping mask.
Enhanced 3D functionality
The Modify Raster, Move Raster, Scale Raster, and Rotate Raster tools support operations on raster images not positioned in XY plane. For these operations, you can set the rotation and affinity angles.
Raster Manager dialog box enhancements

In MicroStation V8 2004 Edition, the Raster Manager dialog box has these enhancements:
134

Enhanced attachment settings
The new GeoPriority column allows full control over the reading of the georeference of the raster: through the DGN attachment, through a worldfile, or directly from the raster header. Color coding helps you visualize the origin of the rasters georeference. Each image file can have a different GeoPriority. The On-the-Fly column indicates if a raster is reprojectable in a DGN file to which MicroStation GeoGraphics has added a coordinate system. The Coordinate System column indicates if the coordinate system in which the raster is projected is inherited from the DGN to which it is attached or if it has been read directly from the raster header. This column is only visible when MicroStation GeoGraphics 2004 Edition and higher is loaded. The lower section of the list box has changed.
Enhanced attachment settings

The following attachment settings allow full control of raster geolocation:
Coordinate System tab (requires MicroStation GeoGraphics 2004 Edition) Geotiff tab GeoPriority list box (on the Location tab).
Enhanced raster reference

The foreground color of a binary raster file can now be selected in the Attach Raster Reference dialog box. The raster preview will reflect the foreground color selected. It is also possible to attach the binary raster file with a transparent background.
135

Enhanced Raster Manager preferences
Enhanced Raster Manager preferences

The check box Use sister file, if present, for georeference lets worldfiles position rasters containing geocoding in their headers (for example: HMR, ITIFF, Rasters in Intergraph formats, GeoTIFF).
The additional Geotiff Default Units and World File Units are available in the Geotiff settings and World File Units fields.
Enhanced reference support

There exist overrides for the following nested raster attachment settings:
View on/off Print Clipping Transparency
Enhanced monochrome manipulation

New workmodes designed for monochrome rasters issued from Raster References or AutoCAD.
Enhanced display
The display of Intergraph RGB JPEG compressed image file has been improved. This results in a better balance between shadows and highlights.
Enhanced configuration variable

A new configuration variable is added to Raster Manager: MS_RASTER_OPTIONAL_HTTPPORT
This variable allows to add another port. For example, if the variable is set to
136

Reprojection capabilities
"MS_RASTER_OPTIONAL_HTTPPORT_8085", Raster Manager will try this port first. If it is not successful, Raster Manager will try the default port.
Reprojection capabilities
Several new Raster Manager features, such as the Coordinate System tab and the On-The-Fly column, exist to support reprojection (on-the-fly transformation) of raster images with MicroStation GeoGraphics 2004 Edition.
Text Style Enhancements

The redesigned Text Styles dialog box (Element > Text Styles) in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition consists of five tabs; each of which deals with a different category of text attributes. Also added are the Tree and Preview Text Icons, which will be explained in more detail.
Optional hierarchy tree

You can display the list of text styles and child styles in tree form to the left of the tabs. The hierarchy tree display can also be toggled by clicking the tree icon below the Style and View menus.
137

Preview
If the hierarchy tree is hidden, the various text styles can still be selected by clicking on the pull-down arrow next to the Hierarchy Tree icon.
Preview
The dialog box has an optional preview panel; which allows the style name to appear using the font selected for that style. This option can also be toggled by clicking the Toggle Preview Icon below the Style and View menus.
To customize the text displayed in the preview panel, choose View > Preview Text, then toggle on the Use the Following Text for Preview setting, and then key in the desired text characters, numbers, symbols, or fractions.
Right-click options
Right-clicking a style name opens a pop-up menu. The most notable of the pop-up menu items is New Child which creates a new style under the style selected with all the same settings as the Parent Style. If any of the settings are changed, the setting appears blue, indicating that the setting is an override of the Parent Style. The other pop-up menu items are Save, Copy, Rename, Delete, and Reset.
Text Editing Enhancements

There are a pair of noteworthy enhancements to MicroStations text editing functionality in the 2004 Edition.
Shortcut for editing a text element

There is a shortcut for editing a text element: 1. Select the Element Selection tool.
138

Tabs and indents
2. Position that tools arrow pointer on the text element you want to edit. 3 . Double-click the Data button.
This activates the Edit Text tool. The Text Editor window opens and the elements text is selected.
Tabs and indents

The Word Processor Text Editor window has a ruler for setting tab stops and indents. The ruler works like the rulers in basic word processing applications. To open a dialog box for keying in tab stops and indents, right-click the ruler and choose the item in the pop-up menu.
Dimensioning Enhancements
The dimensioning tools have been enhanced to improve your dimensioning workflow.
The new Dimensioning tool box (Tools > Main > Dimensioning) includes seven tools. Some of the dimensioning tools are combined, and tool settings are expanded to speed access to commonly changed settings during dimensioning. The traditional dimension tools remain available (Tools > Dimension Tools).
Additionally, the order of selecting dimension points is changed, enabling earlier dynamic display of the dimension. Under the old selection method, you select the start point, the location, and then the end point of the dimension. Under the new method, you select the start point and end point of the dimension, followed by the location.
This new method is the default. However, you can restore the traditional point order by setting the configuration variable MS_DIMLEGACYPOINTORDER to 1.
139

Dimension styles
Dimension styles
The name of the Dimension Settings dialog box has been changed to Dimension Styles.
Dimension Audit utility

Dimension Audit (Utilities > Dimension Audit) is used to audit the dimensions in the active model. Problematic dimensions are highlighted with red ellipses and automatically zoomed. As you correct problems, the red ellipses change to green.
Place Note Enhancements

The Place Note tool includes many new tool settings that enable you to precisely place the note text and leader. The tool now supports multi-line as well as single-line text.
Expanded Place Note tool settings
The new settings include:
Restore Style restores the tool settings to the defaults set for either the Text Style or Dimension Style.
140

Dimension Styles for Place Note
Text Rotation rotation of the text relative to the leader line. Annotation Scale Lock Location whether the leader line can be placed in multiple segments. Leader Type line or curve. Start At whether the note is placed starting with the terminator or the text. Inline Leader optional segment of the leader that is aligned with the text.
Dimension Styles for Place Note

The Dimension Styles dialog box has a new category, Place Note, that includes the settings for the leader (dimension) portion of the Place Note tool.
Dimension Styles dialog box, Place Note category
The Place Note category includes many of the settings of the Place Note tool, plus the following:
Terminator sets the terminator symbol to display. You can also choose a custom symbol, which is set in Note symbol defined in the Terminator Symbols category. Inline Leader usage and length, in working units. Left Margin distance, in working units, between the endpoint of the leader and the text. Lower Margin defines the distance, in working units, between the top and bottom margins of the text, and the top and bottom edges of the text frame (if used).
141

Pop-up Dialog Boxes
Horizontal Attachment, which defines how the note text is attached to the leader. Options include Left, Right, and Automatic. Edit About position of the vertical origin to edit text about. Options include Top, Center, Bottom, and Automatic. Justification controls the alignment of multiple lines of text. Below this control is a graphic that shows the effect of the current settings.
Pop-up Dialog Boxes

You can open several frequently used MicroStation dialog boxes in a mode in which they automatically close when you are done making changes.
The following dialog boxes have this option:
Cell Library Key-in window Level Display Level Manager Models Raster Manager References
To open one of these dialog boxes in the pop-up mode, click the downward pointing triangle just to the right of the dialog boxs icon in the Primary Tools tool box. When a dialog box is opened in this mode, removing the pointer from the dialog box causes the dialog box to close.
Windows File Selection Dialog Boxes

As in previous editions of MicroStation, DGN file selection dialog boxes, such as New, Open, and Save As, by default, are not native Windows dialog boxes. To enable the use of native Windows file selection dialog boxes, turn on Use Windows File Open Dialogs in the Look and Feel category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences).
142

Reminders to Save the Open File
While Use Windows File Open Dialogs is on, holding down the Shift key and clicking the Cancel button in a Windows dialog box or pressing Shift-Esc closes that dialog box and reopens it in the non-native style.
Reminders to Save the Open File

By default, MicroStation reminds you to save the open file 5 minutes after the first change you make if the open file is a V7 file or a DWG file. Furthermore, if the preference Automatically Save Design Changes, which replaces Immediately Save Design Changes, is turned on, MicroStation automatically saves the file 15 seconds after it displays the reminder prompt. Automatically Save Design Changes is on by default.
There are configuration variables that provide additional flexibility in customizing these aspects of operation. For example, to configure MicroStation to remind you to save a DWG file every two minutes, change the configuration variable MS_DWGAUTOSAVE to 120 (seconds). (The default is 300.)
In addition, you can also set MS_DGNAUTOSAVE, MS_V7AUTOSAVE, MS_V7AUTOSAVE_NODIALOG, and MS_DWGAUTOSAVE_NODIALOG. For information about setting these configuration variables, see their individual descriptions in the Configuration dialog box (Workspace > Configuration).
The preference Automatically Save Design Changes is set in the Operation category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences). If the open file is a V8 DGN file, MicroStation automatically saves the file when it detects two seconds of user inactivity. To modify this behavior, you can turn off Automatically Save Design Changes or change the value of MS_DGNAUTOSAVE.
Compression Options
MicroStation V8 2004 Edition has enhanced file compression options: You can purge empty and unused data resources from the open DGN file as well as deleted elements.
Using the Compress Options dialog box (File > Compress > Options), you
143

Expanded Drag-and-Drop Support
can select from among these types of resources for deletion:
empty cell headers empty text elements text elements that contain only space characters unused named shared cells unused nameless shared cells unused line styles unused dimension styles unused text styles unused levels unused fonts
Expanded Drag-and-Drop Support

Many dialog boxes in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition allow dragging and dropping of list box entries. Some of these dialog boxes are even integrated with Windows Explorer. For example, you can drag reference attachments from Windows Explorer into the References dialog box.
144

Enhanced Pen Input Support
Following is a partial list of dialog boxes with expanded support for drag-and-drop in 2004 Edition:
Batch Convert Batch Print Batch Process Models Multi-snaps References Update Sequence
Enhanced Pen Input Support

Users of pen input devices can optimize the response of MicroStation V8 2004 Edition to pen input.
This is done by opening the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences) to the Input category and setting Click Sensitivity to Pen.
Digital Rights Technologies Enhancements

The file protection capabilities introduced in V8.1 are enhanced for MicroStation V8 2004 Edition as described in the following sections.
Digital signatures created with the 2004 Edition are not backward compatible with V8.1. If you create digital signatures with the 2004 Edition, make sure users with whom you exchange these digital signatures are also using the 2004 Edition.
Selectively enabling types of file protection

Administrators can selectively enable password or certificate protection by setting the configuration variable MS_PROTECTION_ENABLE.
145

Selectively enabling types of licenses
To disable file protection, set the configuration variable to 0, which is the default. To enable password or certificate protection, set the configuration variable to 1. To enable password protection, set the configuration variable to 2. To enable certificate protection, set the configuration variable to 3.
MS_PROTECTION_ENABLE should be used for this purpose instead of MS_PROTECTION_ENCRYPT. The latter is obsolete.
Selectively enabling types of licenses

Administrators can selectively enable the application of password, certificate, and Everyone licenses to protected files by setting the configuration variable MS_PROTECTION_LICENSE_ENABLE.
To disable license creation, set the configuration variable to 0. To enable password licenses, set the configuration variable to 1. To enable certificate licenses, set the configuration variable to 2. To enable Everyone licenses, set the configuration variable to 4. To enable all types of licenses, set the configuration variable to 7, which is the default.
You can enable two or more license types by adding their values together. For example, you can enable password (1) and certificate (2) licenses by setting this variable to 3.
Unencrypting files
The key-in PROTECT ENCRYPT REMOVE enables you to unencrypt the master file without being asked to confirm the action.
Preventing file encryption

If, as the owner of a protected file, you do not want other users to encrypt the file, you can communicate this preference by marking the file with the
146

Multi-line Enhancements
key-in PROTECT NOPROTECT. The key-in PROTECT NOPROTECT 0 reverses the effect of PROTECT NOPROTECT.
Multi-line Enhancements
You can now create multi-line styles, use them with the Place Multi-line tool, and share them with other users in the same manner as text styles and dimension styles. To define multi-line styles use the Multi-line Styles dialog box (Element > Multi-line Styles). Its tabbed interface should look familiar to users of text styles.
Design History Enhancements

MicroStation V8 2004 Edition includes configuration variables that affect the behavior of Design History tools.
New Design History configuration variables include:
MS_DESIGN_HISTORY_COLORS specifies the colors to use when identifying changed elements. MS_DESIGN_HISTORY_COMMIT_ON_CLOSE specifies whether changes are committed to Design History before the file is closed (File > Close).
147

Patterning Enhancements
MS_DESIGN_HISTORY_COMMIT_ON_SAVE specifies whether changes are committed to Design History before the file is saved (File > Save). MS_DESIGN_HISTORY_OWNERSHIP_WARNING specifies whether you are prompted to confirm that you will take ownership of all uncommitted changes from another user. MS_DESIGN_HISTORY_REVISION_NUMBER_FORMAT controls the format of revision numbers.
Patterning Enhancements
There are enhancements to hatching and patterning tools in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition:
Selecting patterning methods

The Tool Settings window for hatching and patterning tools has an icon bar that is used to choose the method element, flood, intersection, etc.
Hole processing
When hatching or patterning an element, you can control the manner in which the tool searches for holes.
Interior shapes processing using the Flood method

When hatching or patterning using the Flood method, you can set the tool to ignore interior shapes, locate interior shapes, or identify alternating interior shapes.
Selecting pattern definitions

The controls in the Tool Settings window for selecting a pattern definition are improved.
148

Modifying existing patterns
Modifying existing patterns

A new tool, Change Pattern, in the Patterns tool box, lets you change the attributes and parameters of an existing pattern, to conform to the current settings.
Visualization Enhancements
MicroStation V8 2004 Edition integrates a number of SELECT enhancements since Version 8.1.
Enhanced Material System

In the 2004 Edition, the tools for defining and assigning materials are redesigned. A new Material Editor dialog box replaces the old Define Materials and Assign Materials dialog boxes. The new dialog box has a tree view that shows all materials in all palettes, as well as current assignments and attachments. It has both basic and advanced interfaces and is completely resizable.
149

Faster Creation of Particle-Traced Images
In the tree view, you can use a right click menu to manipulate materials. Additionally, you can use drag and drop to move or copy materials from one palette file to another.
Also updated is the user interface for the Apply Material tool. It includes a new control that lets you interactively adjust map sizes and positions.
Faster Creation of Particle-Traced Images

To significantly reduce the amount of time spent waiting for a particle-traced image to render, there is an option to mesh only those surfaces that are visible in a view. The tool tips in the Render settings window provide better status information for partial solutions (where not all surfaces have been meshed).
Real-World Ray Tracing

There is a Real World Lighting option for ray tracing. When enabled, ray-traced images will be rendered using the same lighting attenuation and lumen values as radiosity and particle tracing. This makes it much easier to get material and lighting values correct by ray tracing before starting radiosity and particle tracing solutions.
Define Light tool enhancements

A number of enhancements have been applied to setting up and controlling source lighting cells with the Define Light tool.
150

Define Light tool enhancements
Icons display on/off status

In the Light List, icons indicate the on/off status of the light sources, with yellow light bulbs denoting lights that are on and black light bulbs those that are off.
Define Light settings showing Spot Lights 1 and 4 are on, while 2 and 3 are off.
Editing multiple light sources

You now can edit multiple light sources in one operation, using the Define Light tool. You can select multiple light sources from the Light List (using Ctrl Data, for example, to select multiple lights) and then make adjustments to the settings, which then are applied to all of the selected lights.
Light source cells enhancements

Light source cells now display their geometry only in the views the text/enter data fields are hidden. As well, the initial size of the cells is increased. Still, you can vary the size of the cells via the Cell Scale setting.
Lighting tool tips

Hovering the pointer over a light source cell displays a tool tip giving the type, on/off status, name, Lumens, Intensity, and IES data (if any) for the light source.
151

Specifying an image editor
AccuDraw
When modifying a light sources target, the AccuDraw compass now aligns with the direction of the light.
Specifying an image editor

Setting the configuration variable MS_IMAGE_EDITOR specifies the image editing program that you want to use for editing image files in the Map Editor. Otherwise, the Windows file association program is used.
Enhanced PhotoMatch
PhotoMatch is enhanced to use AccuSnap when enabled. The tool also uses an improved matching algorithm even when the initial view is very different from the desired match.
Create Package Utility

The Create Package wizard is redesigned. It now has the look and feel of standard MicroStation dialog boxes.
Database Interface Enhancements

In MicroStation V8 2004 Edition there are enhancements to the database application interface.
Oracle 9i support
Support for Oracle 9i is included with the database installation option. It is no longer necessary to download the enhancement individually. MicroStation dynamically determines whether to use the Oracle 8i client or the Oracle 9i client depending on the Oracle client present
152

Database linkage verification utility
on the system and the system settings. To connect to Oracle 8 you need to first extract the MicroStation client files from the provided Zip archive.
Database linkage verification utility

The 2004 Edition provides a utility (Settings > Database > Verify Linkages) that enables users of the interface to an external database to change and remove database linkages and verify them in the database. This utility can process multiple linkages or an entire DGN file. To manipulate the database linkages in a DGN file using this utility, MicroStation does not need to be connected to the external database.
Miscellaneous Enhancements
Following are miscellaneous enhancements in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition.
You can match the active settings to some or all attributes of an existing element by merely hovering the pointer over the element and entering a MATCH key-in that has appended to it the keyword FROMCURSOR. To best take advantage of this enhancement, assign key-ins of this form to function keys or AccuDraw shortcuts. You can import multi-line styles (see page 1-47) and dimension styles into the open DGN file from within the Edit Settings dialog box. You can selectively import v7 custom line styles (.rsc) and AutoCAD
153

Menu Changes for the 2004 Edition
line styles (.lin) into the open DGN file from within the Line Style Editor dialog box. You can also export all custom line styles from the open DGN file to .rsc files for use with v7. You can use the 2004 Edition to create digitizing tablet menus. Also, the method and syntax for attaching (activating) these menus has changed. MicroStation now reads menu DGN files directly, eliminating the need for a menu cell library. If you want to use existing menus with the 2004 Edition, it is unlikely you will need to modify their DGN files. Furthermore, there are not compatibility issues regarding existing menu cells, so it is not necessary to change working menus. Since the new attachment method does not require range adjustment, the matrix menu concept is obsolete. If you want to use matrix menus drawn with previous versions, there is a good likelihood they will work as menu DGN files without modification. There is a digitizing tablet menu designed for use with MicroStation V8 supplied with the 2004 Edition. To use this menu, you must print the menu DGN file. The filename is "v8menu.dgn", and the file is installed in Bentleys Workspace\system\menus\dgn directory. This menu was contributed by MicroStation V8 user Andrew Novinc. You can open a Command Prompt and execute a system command from the Key-in window. From the Key-in window you can start another Windows application. Optionally, you can disable MicroStation first. You can use configuration variables in key-ins. As an alternative to the Configuration dialog box (Workspace > Configuration), you can use key-ins to define configuration variables or check their values.
Menu Changes for the 2004 Edition

The following sections list changes in the menu structure for MicroStation V8 2004 Edition. The Edit, Workspace, and Window menus are unchanged.
File menu changes

The Open URL item is removed. The functionality exists in the 2004 Edition
154

Element menu changes
and as before you can access it by keying in DIALOG GETURL.
The Compress Design item is moved to a submenu of the File menu (Compress > Design). The submenu also has an Options item, which is used to open the Compress Options dialog box (see page 1-43).
The Viecon.plot menu item is removed.

The Dimensions item is replaced by Dimension Styles (see page 1-40).
The Multi-lines menu item is replaced by Multi-line Styles (see page 1-47).
The Feature Modeling submenu is used to open dialog boxes used to adjust feature modeling (see page 1-16) settings. This submenu is also the entry point for the Feature Manager window.
Settings menu changes

Choosing Database > Verify Linkages opens the Verify Database Linkages dialog box (see page 1-53), which is used to change and remove database linkages and verify them in the database.
The menu item Locks > Annotation Scale toggles the usage of Annotation Scale, which is particularly useful for composing drawings as sheet models (see page 1-24).
Choosing Snaps > Multi-snaps opens the Multi-snaps dialog box, which is used to define multi-snaps (see page 1-24).
In the Snaps submenu, choosing Multi-snap1, Multi-snap2, or Multi-snap3 activates the corresponding multi-snap (see page 1-24).
155

Tools menu changes
Tools menu changes

The Feature Modeling submenu is used to open tool boxes that contain feature modeling (see page 1-16) tools.
Utilities menu changes

Choosing Standards Checker > Check opens the Standards Checker dialog box, which is used to configure and run the Standards Checker utility (see page 1-19).
Choosing Standards Checker > Configure opens the Standards Checker Settings dialog box, which is used to adjust settings that specify standards against which the Standards Checker utility (see page 1-19) performs checks.
Choosing Dimension Audit opens the Dimension Audit dialog box, which is used to configure and run the Dimension Audit utility (see page 1-40).
Choosing DWG > Audit starts the DWG Audit utility (see page 1-2).
Choosing DWG > Recover opens the Recover DWG File dialog box, which is used to select a DWG file to recover.
Help menu changes

The Discussion Groups item enables easy access to Bentley discussion groups.
156
Whats New in MicroStation V8.1?

MicroStation V8.1 introduced several important enhancements to MicroStation.
File Protection
MicroStations file protection functionality enables you to restrict access to the contents of a DGN file. File protection can be used in several ways, from simple password-protection to digital rights enforcement. MicroStation uses encryption to protect a DGN file. A protected DGN file is inaccessible to unauthorized people even if they hold a copy of the file. Authorized users are identified by digital certificates.
Before opening a protected DGN file, MicroStation authenticates the user and applies the assigned rights by allowing only digitally signed tools and MDL applications that have been identified by the file author as rights-compliant to operate on the file.
The cryptography and digital certificate mechanisms upon which MicroStations file protection capabilities are based are widely used and trusted in Internet-based systems. Furthermore, MicroStations implementation integrates smoothly with the security mechanisms of Microsoft Windows.
Digital Signatures
Digital signatures are a mechanism for indicating ones approval of designs to other users and communicating approval in a verifiable manner. You can digitally sign a model or a DGN file. MicroStation graphically indicates model-specific signatures. Multiple signatures can be affixed to a single file or model. Hierarchical signing is also supported, where one signature pre-requisites and depends on prior signatures. A signature can cover the content of a model or file and optionally attached references.
21

Named Groups
Named Groups
You can create named groups of elements, which can be manipulated in the same manner as graphic groups using the Element Selection tool and the Named Groups dialog box (Utilities > Named Groups). Named groups can be nested, a characteristic that makes this type of element grouping exceedingly flexible.
22

Quicksets
Quicksets
You can quickly create named groups using the view control pop-up menu. A named group created in this manner is called a quickset and is automatically named with the prefix Quickset. You can quickly create quicksets, which are a form of named group, using the view control pop-up menu. A named group created in this manner is called a quickset and is automatically named with the prefix Quickset. By default, quickset members are passive, such that manipulating an individual element of a quickset does not affect other members of the group. To work with all members of a quickset you first must recall the quickset. The maximum number of Quicksets in the open DGN file is 10. When you rename a quickset in the Named Groups dialog box, it is no longer considered a Quickset, and its previous name therefore becomes available for assignment to a new Quickset.
Displaysets
You can display the member elements of a displayset by themselves in a view that is, with all other elements hidden. You can create displaysets from selection sets or named groups. Display of elements in the displayset is controlled from the Displayset setting in the View Attributes dialog box.
Interoperability
MicroStation V8.1 features increased interoperability with AutoCAD.
23

Interoperability with AutoCAD 2004
Interoperability with AutoCAD 2004

(effective with V8.1.2) MicroStations support for AutoCAD file formats extends to the AutoCAD 2004 DWG format. You can open an AutoCAD 2004 DWG file in MicroStation in read-only mode. If you wish you can then save the file as a MicroStation DGN file and proceed to modify it.
Attaching references to levels in DWG files

When attaching a reference to a model in a DWG file, you can specify a level for the attachment.
Specifying XREF paths

MicroStation enables you, when saving a DGN file as a DWG file, to control the path stored with XREFs derived from reference attachments.
Controlling DXF precision

You can control the precision of entity location coordinates when saving design data to a DXF file. As many as 16 decimal places are allowed. The greater the precision, the larger the resulting DXF file.
Specifying layer assignment for cells and reference attachments

(effective with V8.1.1) To specify the layer to which normal (unshared) cells and reference attachments are assigned when saving design data to a DWG file, set the configuration variable MS_DWGINSERTLAYER.
Saving planar line strings

(effective with V8.1.2) If the configuration variable MS_DWG_PLANARPOLYLINES is set to 3DPOLYLINE, planar line strings in the open DGN file that are not parallel to the X-Y plane or that have non-zero elevations will be saved to 3D polylines when the file is saved as a DWG file.
24

Displaying invisible geometry
Displaying invisible geometry

For compatibility with AutoCADs options for displaying the control polygons of B-spline curves, invisible edges of mesh elements, and other invisible geometry, the MicroStation key-in SET INVISGEOM enables you to globally control this geometrys display. Element-based invisible geometry display control, which is available for DGN data through the B-splines and 3D dialog box (Element > B-spline and 3D), is not enabled in DWG workmode.
Enter data fields

(effective with V8.1.2) To prevent text elements containing only empty enter data fields from being saved when the open DGN file is saved as a DWG file, set the configuration variable MS_DWG_CREATE_SPACE_FROM_EDF to the value 1.
Font naming
(effective with V8.1.2) You can specify a naming template to apply to MicroStation fonts when saving DGN files in DWG format by defining the configuration variable MS_DWGSAVETEXTSYLETEMPLATENAME.
Remapping fonts
(effective with V8.1.2) The remapping table controls how element parameters such as levels, symbology, fonts, or cell names are remapped to different values when the file is saved to another format. The Fonts section of the remapping table includes three new remapping qualifiers:
ElementType OutputWidthFactor the width of every remapped text or tag element is multiplied by this factor OutputHeightFactor the height of every remapped text or tag element is multiplied by this factor
25

Using AutoCAD commands
Using AutoCAD commands

To ease the transition of AutoCAD users, MicroStations key-in language incorporates many of the same keywords as one would use to enter commands in AutoCAD. Many of these key-ins have DWG as their first keyword.
Transition help
The MicroStation for AutoCAD Users section of the product help document relates AutoCAD concepts and commands to their MicroStation counterparts.
Other Enhancements
This topic highlights the remaining enhancements in MicroStation V8.1.
Level management
MicroStation V8.0 introduced a new level system. The topics that follow describe enhancements to this system for V8.1.
Copying levels
In the Level Manager dialog box (Settings > Level > Manager), right-clicking a level opens a pop-up menu that enables you to cut, copy, and paste levels. Using the items in this menu makes performing many level management tasks much easier. One such task is copying levels between the open DGN file and other DGN files that contain models that are attached as references to the open file. You can also copy level specifications in this manner to another applications, such as a spreadsheet for documentation purposes.
Filter groups
Using the Filter Groups dialog box, you can define a filter as the intersection or difference between previously defined filters as well as the union.
26

Cells
Deleting unused library levels

To keep the DGNLIB UPDATE LEVELS key-in from deleting all unused library levels, set the configuration variable MS_UPDATE_KEEP_UNUSED_LIBRARY_LEVELS to 1.
Cells
The DELETE SCDEFS <ALL | ANONYMOUS | NAMED> key-in enables you to delete unused shared cell definitions from the open DGN file.
References
Display colors
You can adjust the brightness and contrast with which the colors of elements in an attached reference are displayed, using the Adjust Reference Colors dialog box. This capability is a simpler alternative to level symbology for differentiating elements in attached references from elements in the open DGN file.
To open the Adjust Reference Colors dialog box, select the reference(s) whose colors you want to adjust in the References dialog box (File > Reference) and choose Adjust Colors from the dialog boxs Settings menu.
Live nesting
MicroStation V8.1 enables you to "flatten" live nested references into direct attachments.
Drawing
This topic covers drawing enhancements in MicroStation V8.1.
27

Printing
Extend tool
You can use the Extend tool (formerly Extend Line) to extend arcs.
Drop Element tool

Using the Drop Element tool, you can drop dimension elements to dimension segments or primitive elements.
Pattern Area tool

A True Scale option is available for the Pattern Area tool. This option, like the True Scale option for Place Active Cell, provides the means to adjust for differences between the units of models in which cells were created and the units of the active model.
Printing
This topic covers printing enhancements for MicroStation V8.1.
OLE object support

Bentley printer drivers that generate raster output for example, "hpglrtl.plt" support OLE objects.
Specifying page layout

Operation of MicroStation V8.1 with regard to its page model, including drawing orientation, is consistent with that of MicroStation/J (v7).
28

Text styles
Text styles
During text placement with Place Text or Place Note, you have the option of applying to previously placed text any changes you have made in the Tool Settings window to the active text style or attributes.
Dimension styles
Text styles are fully integrated into dimension styles. To associate a text style with a dimension style, use the Text Style drop-down list box in the Text category of the Dimension Settings dialog box (Element > Dimensions).
Dimension terminators
When using cells as dimension terminators, you can uniformly scale both the width and height of cell terminators. This capability is particularly useful when preparing to save a DGN file as a DWG file.
Managing raster files

Raster Manager has numerous enhancements.
Live nesting of raster references

With Version 8.1 MicroStation extends its support for live nested references to raster references. Nested raster references are optionally listed in the Raster Manager dialog box.
Using the Update Sequence dialog box, you can reorder raster images attached through DGN references or secondary models with raster references from the master model.
29

Managing raster files
Raster references and 3D models

You can display raster references in 3D views with perspective. Furthermore, you can modify a raster reference in views other than Top and apply those modifications even when the setting Apply Rotation and Affinity to Raster is off.
Also, you can adjust the elevation (Z) for raster references in 3D models.
Bentley Descartes V8 output support

It is possible to display transparency and color masks created with Bentley Descartes V8.
GeoTIFF file support

Raster Manager supports GeoTIFF files associated with a world file. A world or sister file, which typically has a .TFW file extension, allows file placement for images that do not have georeference information in their headers. The location information in the world file can override the one included in the GeoTIFF header. Use the key-in RASTER SETCONFIG USEGEOTIFFSISTERFILEON to activate this option.
MrSID, Intergraph TIFF, and RLC file support

Raster Manager supports MrSID, Intergraph TIFF, and RLC files in read-only mode.
Save to JPG
The Batch Converter utility can save monochrome .BMP files to .JPG files.
210

Design history
Design history
Design history capabilities were new in MicroStation V8.0. In V8.1, these capabilities are significantly enhanced. The following topics highlight these enhancements.
Reference history
In the Design History dialog box, along with the history of the open DGN file you can list the history of attached references that reside in external files in which history is recorded.
Adjusting revision numbers

Using the HISTORY SETVERSION key-in, you can set the major version number assigned to new revisions subsequently created in design history.
Applying filtering to Save As operations

When creating a new file with a Save As operation, you can filter the data written to the new file, whether that file be a MicroStation V8, V7, DWG, or DXF file, by excluding one or more of the following types of data:
specific models selected elements the fence contents as determined by the fence selection mode. auxiliary coordinate systems saved views shared cell instances unused shared cell definitions named groups
211

Save 3D as 2D
Save 3D as 2D
When saving a 3D DGN file as a 2D file, there is an option to ignore the rotation of the selected view. Turning on this option preserves the X-Y coordinates of geometry and discards only the Z information. The 2D file is created as if the selected view is a Top view.
Using multiple screens

There is a command line interface for moving view windows and dialog boxes between MicroStation application windows.
Unit specification for Parasolid XMT export

When you export DGN data to Parasolid XMT export, you have the option to specify the units applied for solids transformation.
User interface
This release includes a number of usability enhancements.
Right-click pop-up menus

In text input fields throughout MicroStation, right-clicking opens a pop-up menu that enables you to copy, move, or delete selected text or select all text.
File list icons

Turning on Show File Icons in the New dialog box (File > New), the Open dialog box (File > Open), or the MicroStation Manager dialog box causes icons to display next to MicroStation filenames in the Files list box.
212

User interface
Esc key
The preference Allow ESC key to stop current command, if turned on, enables you to press Esc to stop operation of the selected tool. This preference is in the Input category of the Preferences dialog box.
Key-in window
Right-clicking the Key-in window opens the Key-in Settings dialog box, which is used to set preferences relating to the appearance and operation of the Key-in window.
Menu changes
The following sections list changes in the menu structure for MicroStation V8.1. The Element, Settings, Workspace, Window, and Help menus are unchanged.
File menu
The Protection sub-menu provides access to file protection functionality (see page 2-1).
Edit menu
Selecting an overlapped element and choosing Bring to Front brings that element to the front of the view display. That is, it will overlap the element(s) that previously overlapped it, making it easier to select or snap to.
Tools menu
Choosing Digital Signatures opens the Digital Signatures tool box, which provides access to digital signatures functionality (see page 2-1).
213

Visualization
Utilities menu
Choosing Named Groups opens the Named Groups dialog box, which is used to manage named groups (see page 2-2).
Level filter selection

In the Attributes tool box, there is a new control, Active Level Filter, which, like Active Element Class, is hidden by default. The new control is used to set the active level filter. If you use level filters, consider showing this control in the tool box to save the overhead and screen space associated with opening the Level Manager dialog box.
Raster Manager dialog box entry

In the Primary Tools tool box, clicking the Raster Manager tool icon opens the Raster Manager dialog box. This icon, like Models and Level Manager, is hidden (see page 6-25) in the tool box, as delivered.
Visualization
The following topics contain information about visualization enhancements in MicroStation V8.1.
Interactive brightness control

You can interactively adjust the brightness of the most recently rendered radiosity or particle-traced image. The brightness control is in the Render settings window.
214

OLE DB connectivity
Piranesi EPix format support

You can save images and panoramas in Piranesi Epix format. These images can then be brought into Piranesi, a 3D paint application which enables you to paint over the rendered image or panorama, being sensitive to the 3D surfaces which you are painting.
Selecting light sources

In the Define Light settings window, while Mode is set to Create, if the Name control has an associated drop-down list box, indicated by the presence of a downward-pointing triangle, you can select a pre-defined light source without keying its name.
OLE DB connectivity
OLE DB is Microsofts interface for open data access; it uses a standard set of COM interfaces for accessing and manipulating many types of data. MicroStation V8.1 enables you to connect to an OLE DB data source. Once connected, you can use the same database interface tools available for the ODBC and Oracle database interfaces.
Online help
Directional arrows embedded in the top margin of the Help windows righthand frame enable you to linearly navigate forward and backward through the document content with ease. Embedded in this eye-pleasing margin is the title of the guide or top-level topic that contains the displayed topic.
215
216

MicroStation V8 represents a major step forward in the evolution of the entire MicroStation product line. For the first time in MicroStations history, the fundamental file format is substantially redesigned and upgraded. The new format permits MicroStation and applications to add more intelligence to the models that users create, enabling information to be created and manipulated as components. The expanded data constructs eliminate a number of constraints that were previously imposed on the product, and improve the reliability and robustness of MicroStation, Bentleys Engineering Configurations, and applications that run with MicroStation.
The features of MicroStation V8 represent the beginning of the improvements made possible by the upgraded data storage; future releases of MicroStation will take further advantage of this improved flexibility.
Some immediate benefits result:
Data integrity issues and security issues are more easily resolvable. Disk storage requirements are reduced MicroStation V8 DGN files are significantly smaller than corresponding MicroStation v7 design files 25-50% depending on the type of data. Great strides have been made in eliminating issues that caused inefficiencies in workflows where both MicroStation and AutoCAD are in use on design projects, and where final delivery in DWG format is required. See the section Interoperability with DWG File Format on page 3-40.
MicroStation V8 enhancements that are by-products of the introduction of the MicroStation V8 DGN file format (see page 3-69) are noted below.
31

Production Enhancements
Production Enhancements
MicroStation V8 offers many enhancements designed to facilitate the production of engineering information.
Models
When you draw, or place elements, in a MicroStation V8 DGN file (see page 3-69), you are creating a model. A DGN file is composed of one or more models. Every model has its own set of eight views.
It may be helpful to think of a DGN file as a box that can contain both 3D and 2D objects models any of which you can view individually. There are two types of models design and sheet.
Using the Models dialog box (File > Models), you can create and switch quickly between models in a DGN file. For more information about the Models dialog box, see Models dialog box in the online Reference Guide.
Levels
In the MicroStation V8 DGN file format (see page 3-69), the number of levels is unlimited, and the minimum number of levels is 1. You can delete unused levels. All levels are named and have default colors, line weights, and line styles, providing the foundation for numerous enhancements. Perhaps the most important benefit of the new level system is that it is much easier to standardize level structures across DGN files.
MicroStation V8 levels support:
level symbology override per level Level- and cell-based symbology (in addition to element symbology). Level-based symbology is referred to as ByLevel. Cell-based symbology is referred to as ByCell. level libraries (for project-oriented level definitions)
32

Levels
level hierarchies customizable level attributes
The easiest way to turn the display of levels on and off in views and to set the Active Level is to use the Level Display dialog box. This dialog box is most easily accessible through an icon in the Primary Tools tool box.
The intuitive controls in the Level Manager dialog box (Settings > Level > Manager) enable you to quickly and easily determine and change:
which levels are displayed in which views which levels are populated with design data which levels plot (independent of display) which levels are locked for write access the default color, weight, and line style for each level each levels description which levels are referenced from an external resource
33

View groups
Unnamed levels used in designs created with previous MicroStation versions are assigned special names Level 1, Level 2, and so on upon conversion to MicroStation V8 DGN file format (see page 3-69).
Filters
You can define filters to filter the level entries in the list boxes in the Level Display and Level Manager dialog boxes. You can save and recall sets of applied filters using the contextual (right-click) menu in the list box.
View groups
A view group is a set of view window layouts applicable to a model within the open DGN file.
The View Groups window (Window > Views > Dialog) is used to select the active view group. When you start MicroStation V8 out of the box, the View Groups window is open and docked to the status bar.
34

Saved views
View Groups window

To create and delete view groups and to modify a view groups name and description, use the Manage View Groups dialog box. To open this dialog box, click the icon in the middle of the View Groups window. View groups with changes are saved in the open DGN file when File > Save Settings is chosen.
Saved views
The following categories of settings can be saved with a saved view using the Saved Views dialog box (Utilities > Saved Views):
window aspect ratio, size, or size and position camera position view attributes clip volume level display reference settings
Several of the above list items are MicroStation V8 enhancements.
References
As a result of the presence of models (see page 3-2) in MicroStation V8 DGN files, the term reference file becomes obsolete. The MicroStation V8 term is reference because references are between models. That is:
Within a DGN file, a model may reference other models or itself. A DGN file cannot reference a model or vice-versa. Each such reference is stored in the referencing model as
35

References
a reference attachment. A reference may be in the same DGN file as the active model or in a different DGN file.
Not withstanding the reorientation of the concept and resulting terminology changes, MicroStation V8 features many functionality enhancements. The following sub-sections highlight these enhancements.
Reference attachments
The most noteworthy enhancements to references functionality relate to reference attachments. You can: Attach an unlimited number of references to the active model. Attach DWG files to the active model as references. Optionally save, in reference attachment information, the relative path to the DGN file that contains the attached model.
You can also attach a 3D reference to a 2D master model and vice-versa. If you attach a 3D reference coincident to a 2D master model, you see the 3D elements as they appear in the Top view of the 3D file. If you attach a 3D reference to a 2D master model with a saved view, you see the 3D elements as they appear in the saved view. It is possible to create reference attachments from a saved view with the camera on. This will create an attachment that has its own camera and will therefore appear identical to the saved view. This can be helpful when creating detail sections on sheet models. There is one important caveat: As these attachments are essentially projections from 3D to a 2D image, they are only allowed in 2D master models or sheet models.
When copying elements from an attached 3D reference to a 2D master model using the Copy tool, the elements are converted to 2D. If the 3D element is a B-spline surface, it is converted to a group (orphan cell) with a network of B-spline curves that are graphically equivalent to the wireframe appearance of the 3D B-spline. Similarly, cones are converted to a group of
36

References
elements that are graphically equivalent to the wireframe and are put in a group. 3D surfaces and solids are treated the same way.
Attaching references
When attaching a reference with different units than the active model, you can soft-scale the reference attachment to adjust it to the units and unit type (English or metric) of the active model. To enable these adjustments, turn on True Scale in the Attach Reference Settings dialog box.
Aligning Global Options

When referencing a model from a DGN file whose Global Origin is different than the open DGN file, the Coincident - World option in the Attach Reference Settings dialog box takes into account the DGN files Global Origins as well as their design plane coordinates. Note that the Coincident World option does not appear when you are in or are referencing models in DWG files, since DWG does not have a Global Origin concept.
37

References
REFERENCE ATTACH (RF=) key-in

The REFERENCE ATTACH (RF=) key-in syntax is as follows:
RF=configuration_variable:]<filename> [,model_name] [,logical_name] [,description] [,view_name] [,scale] [,nesting][ON|OFF].
For detailed information about the REFERENCE ATTACH (RF=) key-ins parameters, see Attach Reference in the User Guide. You can use spaces instead of commas as parameter delimiters.
Merging references
To merge a reference into the active model, identify or select the reference(s), and in the References dialog box, choose Tools > Merge Into Master.
Exchanging
To open the DGN file that contains a reference, identify or select the reference, and in the References dialog box, choose Tools > Exchange. The Tools > Exchange menu item is a graphical interface for the EXCHANGEFILE key-in.
Reference display
The Set Reference Presentation tool in the References tool box is used to set a references Display Mode either wireframe or rendered.
38

References
You can set the manner in which attached references are highlighted by choosing Settings > Hilite > in the References dialog box. Boundaries are highlighted by default. Highlighting is optional.
Reference clipping
Reference clipping is defined relative to the world coordinates, and the clipped volume remains the same in all views. Furthermore, you can define a clipping boundary for a reference by identifying an element in the active model. The element must be closed and planar for example, a circle, ellipse, complex shape, grouped hole. Modifying the clip element automatically updates the view to reflect the new clipping boundary.
Deleting reference clip masks

The Delete Reference Clip tool works on only one reference at a time, so if there is more than one reference selected in the References dialog box it works on the first one.
When you select the reference (either in the dialog box or graphically), the reference is highlighted. If there is a clip boundary and one or more masks, the boundary is shown in color 4, typically yellow, with the dashed line style and line weight 3. The mask(s) are shown in color 3, typically red. You then identify the boundary or mask to delete.
39

References
If there is only one mask or boundary, or if the reference is clipped by an element, MicroStation V8 highlights the clipping feature and prompts you to accept or reject the clip boundary or mask. Accepting causes MicroStation V8 to delete the clip boundary, mask, or element; rejecting either the terminates the tools operation or causes MicroStation V8 to prompt you to select or identify another reference, depending upon the manner in which you selected or identified the previous reference.
References tool operation

Various reference tools for example, Move Reference, Rotate Reference, and Scale Reference are redesigned to operate consistently with their counterparts in the Manipulate tool box: Instead of terminating after an operation on a single reference, these tools remain active, enabling you to select or identify another reference on which to operate. These tools dynamically display a manipulation as you perform it. You can temporarily interrupt the operation of these tools to use view controls. To distinguish multiple references on which to operate, you can use the fence, the Element Selection tool, reference groups, which are analogous to graphic groups, and the list box in the References dialog box. With the fence, if an element in a reference satisfies the fence criteria, the associated reference will be manipulated. With Element Selection. if you select an element in a reference, the associated reference will be manipulated. These tools have settings, some of which are common to all manipulations, such as Use Fence and the associated option menu for choosing the fence selection mode. The Use Reference Dialog List checkbox is dimmed (disabled) if the References dialog box is either closed or minimized.
Copying reference attachments

The Copy Reference tool is used to copy references. This tool operates on references in the same manner as the Copy Element tool operates on elements in the active model.
310

References
Grouped reference attachments

The REFERENCE GROUP ADD and REFERENCE GROUP DROP key-ins are used to flexibly group and ungroup reference attachments in the same manner as the Add to Graphic Group and Drop from Graphic Group tools are used with graphical elements. That is, without breaking up the grouping, which is called a reference group, you can add, remove, or manipulate individual member references. The Graphic Group Lock setting applies to reference groups as well as graphic groups.
Rotating references
You can rotate a reference by entering data points to define the angle of rotation. To invoke this method, set Method to By Points in the Rotate Reference settings window.
Scaling references
You can scale a reference by the Active Scale factors or by entering data points to define the scale factor.
311

References
To scale by a factor, choose Scale Factor from the Method option menu in the Scale Reference settings window, and in the Scale Factor field, key in the factor. Specify the factor as the ratio of the active models Master Units to the references master units.
To graphically define the scale factor, set Method to By Points in the Scale Reference settings window. To set the absolute scale ratio between the reference and the active model, choose the other Method option: Absolute Ratio.
Nested reference attachments

MicroStation V8 provides live nested reference attachments (as an alternative to flattening all reference attachments in the active model). When this option is enabled, changes to reference attachments in designs that are referenced to other designs are reflected the next time either the active models views are updated or the file is reopened.
Reload All
Reload All, on the Reference dialog boxs Tools menu, reloads all attached references allowing you to see changes that have been made to these references since they were last attached or reloaded.
MS_OPENREFFILEFILTER
This configuration variable is used to override the default (.dgn) file filter on the Attach Reference dialog box. For example, if MS_OPENREFFILEFILTER is set to .dwg, then a list of available dwg files displays when the Attach Reference dialog box opens.
312

Placing elements
Placing elements
The expanded MicroStationV8 DGN file format provides greater ability to connect virtually an unlimited number of points for elements or fences. Additionally, enhancements to the Place Arc tool allow for greater flexibility in arc placement.
Line strings, point curves, and shapes

In the MicroStation V8 DGN file format (see page 3-69), a line string, shape, or point curve can have up to 5000 vertices. There is no limit to the number of components in a complex chain or complex shape.
Place Arc tool

MicroStation V8 enables you to place arcs counterclockwise or clockwise. Additionally, the Length setting locks the length when placing an arc.
Arcs (with Method set to Center) can be placed either counterclockwise (left) or clockwise (right).
AccuDraw
AccuDraw is enhanced for MicroStation V8.
AccuDraw automatically starts when you open a DGN or DWG file.
313

Grid orientation
When Auto Point Placement is on in the Operation tab of the AccuDraw Settings dialog box (Settings > AccuDraw), data points are placed automatically when they are fully constrained that is, both the X and Y values are locked, or if either is locked while the pointer is indexed to zero. Auto Point Placement is off by default this capability is recommended for advanced users.
When Sticky Z Lock is on, when you lock the Z axis, it remains locked through consecutive operations instead of unlocking after you enter a data point. This setting is useful, for example, where you want to draw on one plane that is, you want to lock Z=0 while snapping to elements on another plane. With Sticky Z Lock on, the Z value remains locked. Sticky Z Lock is off by default.
AccuDraw Settings dialog box

The dialog box controls used to adjust AccuDraw settings are consolidated in the AccuDraw Settings dialog box (Settings > AccuDraw). This dialog box is redesigned with tabs. Each of the four tabs corresponds to a category of AccuDraw settings. The tabs are labeled as follows: Operation Display Coordinates
Grid orientation
There is more than one way to align the grid. The new options are primarily useful for 3D modeling.
314

AccuSnap
You can align the grid with the active ACS or with a Top, Right, or Front view, as well as with the view.
The Grid Orientation option menu in the Grid category of the DGN File Settings dialog box (Settings > Design File) is used to set the grid orientation.
While Grid Orientation is set to
Top, the grid extends along the X and Y axes from the global origin. Right, the grid extends along the Y and Z axes from the global origin. Front, the grid extends along the X and Z axes from the global origin.
Perspective view displaying the grid with Orientation set to Top
AccuSnap
AccuSnap is a new snapping mode that may be used by itself, or in combination with AccuDraw, to reduce the number of button presses required during a design session. AccuSnap provides graphical assistance a smart pointer for snapping to elements. In AccuSnap mode, with Show Tentative Hint
315

AccuSnap
turned on, you simply select a tool and move the pointer over the elements. As you do this AccuSnap displays the nearest snap point with a crosshair (the tentative hint). When you move the pointer close to this hint, the crosshair changes to a heavier line weight X and the element highlights, denoting a tentative snap point. This eliminates the need to press the Tentative button. The location of the snapping point depends on the Snap Mode setting.
To toggle AccuSnap mode on/off, click the Toggle AccuSnap button on the Snap Mode button bar. To open the AccuSnap Settings dialog box, choose Settings > Snaps > AccuSnap.
To snap to an element using AccuSnap (with Show Tentative Hint)

1. Move the pointer to the vicinity of the desired snapping point. As the pointer moves across or near an element, AccuSnap highlights the element and displays a dashed crosshair at the nearest potential snapping point, as determined by the Snap Mode setting. 2. Move the pointer towards the crosshair, until it becomes a heavier line weight X, then press the Data button. A data point is entered at the location indicated by the X.
With both Show Tentative Hint, and Display Icon turned on Left: With the pointer within the snap tolerance of an element, AccuSnap shows a prospective snap point with a crosshair (+), along with the current snap mode icon. Right: When the pointer is within Keypoint Sensitivity range, AccuSnap highlights the element and displays the tentative snap point as a heavy line weight X. A data point at this stage will be placed at the tentative snap point location.
316

Locating elements
Locating elements
Whenever you attempt to identify an element that is not allowed by the selected tool (e.g., it is the wrong type for the tool, it is locked, or in a reference, etc.), MicroStation reports the reason the element cannot be selected.
MicroStation V8 automatically locates elements as you point to them, so that you can tell if an element is acceptable without having to press the Data button. This helps you determine a tools intent and, in some cases the Delete Element tool, for example saves you from entering a data point to accept the identified element.
This feature is enabled by default. To disable it, turn off Identify Elements Automatically on the General tab in the AccuSnap Settings dialog box (Settings > Snaps > AccuSnap).
Immediately below the Identify Elements Automatically check box is a check box and option menu labeled Pop-up Info. If Pop-up Info is on, when you point at or enter a tentative point on an element, depending on the Pop-up Info option chosen, MicroStation V8 displays a tool tip showing the element type and level of that element.
PowerSelector tool
The PowerSelector tools settings window is enhanced to simplify the process of defining attribute-based element selection criteria and to accommodate the MicroStation V8 DGN file format (see page 3-69). The settings window contains a tab for each attribute-based selection criterion (tab titles are in parentheses):
level (Lv) color (Co) line style (Lc) line weight (Wt) element type (Ty) class (Cl)
317

Manipulating and modifying elements

MicroStation V8 has enhancements to improve the manipulation and modification of elements.
Move/Copy Parallel tool

The Move/Copy Parallel tool is enhanced: The tool setting Gap Fill Mode determines the manner in which the gap created by moving two connected elements to a parallel location is filled. The options are Miter and Rounded.
Move/Copy Parallel tool lets you choose between mitred (left) and rounded (right) to close gaps at vertices.
Graphically defining the distance

By clicking the icon next to the Distance field in the Move/Copy Parallel settings window upon selecting this tool, you can graphically define the distance by which to move or copy.
Scale tool
The About Element Center setting allows you to scale one or more elements about each elements center point instead of an identified point.
318

Left: Selecting the elements to scale with a fence. Right: After scaling the elements with About Element Center turned on (originals shown dashed).
Rotate tool
The About Element Center setting allows you to rotate one or more elements about each elements center point instead of an identified point.
With Method set to Active Angle, and About Element Center turned on: Left: Identify the element (1) a cell in the illustration Center: The rotation displays dynamically Right: Accept (2) to complete the rotation about the center of the element
319

Left: Selecting the elements to rotate with a fence. Right: After rotating elements about their centers.
Fence operations
Like line strings, point curves, and shapes, the fence can be placed with as many as 5000 vertices.
Fence persistence in 3D is the same as in 2D; you can place a fence in a 3D file, zoom in on a design and, when you zoom back out, the fence remains intact. Also, in 3D, the fence is parallel to the view in which it is placed.
Selecting elements by dragging with the Element Selection tool removes the fence.
Change Element Attributes tool

Enhancements to the Change Element Attributes tool enable you to change an elements attributes without affecting the active settings. Also, using this tool you can both match and change element attributes.
320

Cells
Cells
Cell names and cell sizes are unlimited in the MicroStation V8 DGN file format (see page 3-69).
When you first attach a MicroStation v7 cell library during a MicroStation V8 session, it is automatically converted to MicroStation V8 format. The original version is saved in the directory specified by the MS_BACKUP configuration variable.
MicroStation V8 cell libraries can contain both 2D and 3D cells. 2D cells can be placed in 3D DGN files and vice-versa. When a 3D cell is placed in a 2D DGN file, the cells Top view is displayed. It is not possible to save a MicroStation V8 cell library as a MicroStation v7 cell library.
Cell-based symbology (ByCell)

Another aspect of MicroStation V8s interoperability with the DWG file format (see page 3-40) is its support of cell-based symbology or ByCell. When the active color, line style or line weight is set to ByCell, cells are placed with the active attribute(s) rather than the cells own attribute(s).
ByCell is enabled by default only in DWG Restriction workmode.
321

Cells
Browsing cells
You can browse the contents of cell libraries when setting the Active Cell using the Place Active Cell settings window. Clicking the magnifying glass icon next to the Active Cell field opens the Cell Library dialog box for browsing.
Placing cells
When placing or replacing a cell that was created in a model with different units than the active model, you can soft-scale the cell to adjust it to the units and unit type (English or metric) of the active model. To enable these adjustments, turn on the tool setting True Scale. This approach is workable in MicroStation V8 because the working units of the model from which a cell is created are stored with the cell in the cell library. Furthermore, the MicroStation V8 DGN file format (see page 3-69) makes working unit settings insignificant for practical purposes.
Hatching and patterning

In the Pattern Area settings window, clicking the magnifying glass icon opens the Cell Library dialog box so you can select the Active Pattern Cell. If the selected cell is not in an attached cell library, the cell library in which it resides is automatically attached.
MicroStation V8 enables you to:
322

3D Modeling
create patterns that regenerate when a patterned regions boundaries are moved. reassociate disassociated patterns create single associative patterns with disjointed regions.
Hatching disjointed regions. Left: Select the regions to flood hatch (<Ctrl>-data points 13). Right: Accept to hatch the selected regions (4).
MicroStation V8 provides visual feedback when a pattern created in this manner becomes disassociated, making it easy for you to reassociate it.
3D Modeling
MicroStation V8 enhancements to 3D modeling tools allow for shell, thicken and modify face operations on non-analytical geometry that is, SmartSolids that contain B-spline faces. These enhancements affect certain tools in the Curves (see page 3-24), Modify Curves (see page 3-25), 3D Primitives (see page 3-25), 3D Modify (see page 3-26), 3D Utility (see page 3-27), and Modify Surfaces (see page 3-28) tool boxes. In addition, the operation of a group of 3D modeling tools is more consistent (see page 3-28) with other drawing tools.
Shell Solid (above) and Thicken to Solid (below) now support SmartSolids that contain B-spline faces.
323

3D Modeling
Curves tool box

The Offset Element tool is renamed Offset Curve, and the tool settings are changed. Gap Fill Mode is noteworthy among the tool settings: the gap-filling options are Miter, Round, and Natural.
Offset curve with Gap Mode set to Round (left) and Miter (right). Identify the curve (1) and create the offset curves (2 & 3).
The Extract Iso-parametric lines tool is enhanced to extract rule lines from any type of surface including faces of a solid.
324

3D Modeling
Modify Curves tool box

The Rebuild Curve tool replaces the Reduce Curve Data tool. This tool is used to rebuild a curve, reduce a curves data, or reparameterize a curve, depending on the chosen Type.
When using the Change Element Direction tool on a closed element, the tool setting Mode is used to determine the tools effect reversing the shapes direction or changing its starting point.
You can deform a curve with restricted parameter domain using the Deform Curve tool.
3D Construct tool box

The Extrude tool has an option for extruding the profile element in both directions.
325

3D Modeling
When Both Directions is turned on, the profile is extruded in both directions
The Extrude Along Path tool provides a choice between extruding the profile from its current position, following a path defined by the path element, or extruding along a path element to which the profile is attached. This option applies only to non-circular profiles. Also, the tool adds support for holes.
3D Modify tool box

You can taper a surface or solid using a specialized tool Taper Solid/Surface. A cube display updates dynamically to allow you to preview the results. You
326

3D Modeling
can apply the tool to all faces of the surface or solid or to selected faces.
Edit 3D Primitive is a general tool for modifying the properties of 3D primitive elements. For example, in the case of a slab created with the Place Slab tool, you can modify its length, width, and height.
3D Utility tool box

The Change SmartSolid Display tool is enhanced to let you suppress rule lines for B-spline faces and/or complex blending faces. Also, when setting the number of rule lines that are used to represent the curved surfaces of SmartSolids and SmartSurfaces, you can specify the number of lines in the U and V directions.
You can create a set of planar shapes from a 3D element based on a specified tolerance using the Construct Facet tool. The shapes can either be saved in a single element called a mesh element or saved to the DGN file as individual elements.
327

3D Modeling
Rendered image showing original element left and the faceted element right.
Modify Surfaces tool box

An option has been added to the Construct Trim and Project Trim tools to specify whether the solid upon which the tool operates remains a solid or is converted to a surface.
The Modify Trim Boundary tool is renamed Untrim Surface. It operates on smart surfaces as well as B-spline surfaces. Where a trim boundary is shared by two faces, along an edge, no change is made.
3D tool operation
The operation of the following tools is, in general, more consistent with most MicroStation V8 tools: Chamfer Edges Extract Face or Edge Geometry
328

Apply Clip Volume To View view control
Fillet Edges Modify Solid Remove Faces Shell Solid Taper Solid
After you identify the first face or edge using one of these tools, you can identify additional faces or edges by entering data points while holding down the Ctrl key.
While using Fillet Edges, after you identify one edge, entering another data point (without holding down Ctrl) starts the filleting operation. To identify a back (non-visible) face, you must first Reset.

Using the Apply Clip Volume To View view control in the View Control tool box (Tools > View Control), you can limit the displayed volume for a view. Doing this will allow you to work efficiently within a limited volume without being hindered by geometry that is outside the volume of interest, but within the view volume. For example, consider a 3D model of a building. You might want to limit the displayed volume in order to work on a single room of the building without the distraction of outer walls, roofing systems, or other room details.
Once a clip volume is applied, elements outside of the clip volume are not displayed and are effectively disregarded as you select elements or snap to them. The clip volume is also applied for such operations as rendering, fence manipulations, and hidden line removal.
When using Apply Clip Volume To View, you identify a clipping element. Once the clipping volume is applied to the view, modifying the clipping element causes the view to automatically update to reflect the new clipping volume.
329

Before applying a clip volume, the view is crowded, making the stairwell hard to discern.
After applying a clip volume, the stairwell is clearly seen.
If you frequently use Apply Clip Volume To View, consider adding it to the view control bar using the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize). In MicroStation V8.5 (see page 1-1), this view control is extended and renamed Clip Volume.
330

Disabling front and back view clipping
Related view attributes

The Clip Volume setting in the View Attributes dialog box (Settings > View Attributes) toggles the clipping of elements for a given view. If no clipping element has been applied to the view it has no effect.
The Clip Boundaries setting in the View Attributes dialog box controls whether the boundaries of the clip volume are displayed for a given view, as well as reference clip boundaries.
Disabling front and back view clipping

In the View Attributes dialog box (Settings > View Attributes), the Clip Back and Clip Front settings enable you to toggle the display of elements and parts of elements located outside a 3D views clipping planes.
Deleting tags
MicroStation V8 has a tool for removing tags from selected elements Delete Tags in the Tags tool box.
Annotations
MicroStation V8 allows for more efficient handling of text by using TrueType and AutoCAD shx fonts natively, allowing the definition of text styles, supporting masking, overline, italics, and bold, and incorporating a Quick Text editor mode.
331

Annotations
Font system
The font system is enhanced to allow the use of TrueType and AutoCAD SHX fonts natively without import via the Font Installer utility.
Each font type has a specific font number range:

MicroStation fonts AutoCAD SHX fonts TrueType fonts 0-255 512-1023 1024-65535
The Missing Fonts preference in the Text category of the Preferences dialog box controls the manner in which fonts missing from your system are listed in font selection combo boxes.
Word processor-style text editor

The default text editor in MicroStation V8 provides text presentation capabilities similar to those commonly found in word processor applications for example, bolding, italicizing, underlining, and spell checking.
332

Annotations
To select a different style text editor, such as the Text Editor window from MicroStation v7, change Text Editor Style in the Text category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences).
Text styles
Text styles are the primary means by which text attributes are defined and applied in MicroStation V8. A text style is a saved set of text attributes. You can define text styles and apply them to text elements during and after placement.
The Text Style Editor dialog box (Element > Text Styles) is used to manage text styles. The Place Text and Change Text Attributes tools each have a Text Style option menu for choosing the text style to apply. If the active text style is set to (none), the active text attributes are applied.
Text display
Text in MicroStation V8 supports masking and overline. Text masking blanks a polygon around the text with the same color as the background. When you place text with text masking enabled, all vector and raster information behind
333

Annotations
the text is masked, eliminating any interference with existing geometry/image information making the text much more readable. This is an efficient scheme that doesnt break up any existing geometry and is scalable.
To enable masking, turn on Background Color in the Advanced tab of the Text Styles dialog box (Element > Text Styles).
Text attributes
Bold and italicized text can be placed using TrueType fonts in MicroStation V8.
Quick Text Edit

Editing text in MicroStation V8 is easier. When using the Edit Text tool, selecting a text element automatically opens the Word Processor Text Editor window with the selected text highlighted. After making changes to the text, a data point accepts the changes. Each subsequent text element you select in the model automatically replaces the last one in the Word Processor Text Editor window. If the Text Editor Style preference is set to Dialog Box, you must turn on Quick Edit in the Edit Text settings window to cause the tool to operate in the manner described above. In the Text Editor window a right-click menu contains the items Copy, Cut, Paste, and Select All.
Spell checking preferences

You can fine-tune your Spell Checker settings using the controls in the Spelling category in the Preferences dialog box (Workspace menu > Preferences).
In this category, you can set Spell Checker to ignore domain names, words with numbers, words of mixed cases, and so on. You can also specify the default language. MicroStation V8 recognizes the difference
334

Dimensioning
between American English and British English.
Dimensioning
MicroStation V8 has several dimensioning enhancements. You can:
Set up alternate dimensions based on criteria that you define providing the ability, for example, to dimension in sub-units below a certain value and in master units greater than or equal to that value. This setting, Alternate Label, is in the Units category of the Dimension Settings dialog box (Element > Dimensions). Modify the location of a dimension value to something other than horizontal along the dimension line. This capability is called dimensioning with leader or ball and chain. You can define the manner, if any, in which the dimension text visually identifies the dimension with which it is associated. You can also choose that the dimension text not identify the dimension with which it is associated. These settings are in the Dimension With Leader category of the Dimension Settings dialog box (Element > Dimensions). Dimension styles are the primary means by which dimensioning settings are defined and applied in MicroStation V8. A dimension style is a saved set of dimensioning settings. You can define dimension styles and apply them to dimension elements during placement. The Dimension Settings dialog box (Element > Dimensions) is used to manage dimension styles. The dimensioning tools in the Dimension tool box each have an option menu for choosing the dimension style to apply. If the active dimension style is set to (none), the active dimensioning settings are applied. Store dimension styles in either the DGN file or in an external library. This allows more automated management of dimension layout with reduced user impact.
335

Engineering Links
Engineering Links
Two tools are added to the Engineering Links tool box:
Edit Engineering Tags used to edit an Internet tag that is attached to an element. Delete Engineering Link used to remove an attached Internet tag from an element.
Printing enhancements
MicroStation V8 has enhancements to printing that provide expanded capabilities and better visual feedback. The Print dialog box has been redesigned and pen tables and the batch printing utility have been enhanced.
336

Print dialog box

The Print dialog box is redesigned and incorporates the following enhancements: You can specify monochrome, gray-scale, or RGB output using controls in the dialog box. Choosing File > Edit Printer Driver opens the selected printer driver for editing outside MicroStation V8. The text editor in which the printer driver is opened is specified by the configuration variable MS_PLTFILE_EDITOR; the default is "notepad.exe" (Windows Notepad). If MS_PLTFILE_EDITOR is set to HIDE_MENU_ITEM, this menu item is omitted from the File menu. Choosing File > Reload Printer Driver causes MicroStation V8 to reread the selected printer driver. This is useful when the printer driver has just been modified. There are two print preview options in the dialog box and in a separate resizable preview window, which is opened from MicroStation V8s main menu bar File > Print Preview. Clicking the magnifying glass icon in the Print Size/Scale section of the full-size dialog box opens the Scale Assistant dialog box, which enables you to define the scale criteria either as design-to-paper or paper-to-design for example, 1/4 inch to 1 foot.
Print dialog box, fully expanded to show all settings.
337

Pen tables
Pen tables are enhanced. You can: import color and line weight changes from AutoCAD CTB and STB files, specify output line weights in different units, specify output fill color and fill pattern, the latter only with Windows and RIP printer drivers, specify output color and fill color in RGB, set a screening value for output color and fill color, ensure that dashed lines are not printed with gaps at vertices, specify line caps as rounded, square, or flat (Windows and RIP printer drivers only), specify line joins as beveled, mitred, or flat (Windows and RIP printer drivers only).
Batch printing
Batch printing is enhanced as follows: In the Batch Print dialog box (File > Batch Print), double-clicking a printing specification in the Specifications Controlling Printing list box opens a dialog box for selecting that specification. In the Batch Print dialog box, right-clicking a printing specification in the Specifications Controlling Printing list box opens a contextual menu containing the same items as the dialog boxs Specifications menu. The configuration variable MS_BATCHPRINT_LOGFILE specifies the path and filename of the batch printing log file.
Raster image processor

MicroStation V8 can use a raster image processor (RIP) to drive the printing process. This is particularly useful for printing DGN files with large raster files attached.
338

Utilities
To use this capability, select a RIP printer driver file delivered with MicroStation V8 in the Workspace\system\plotdrv directory. For gray-scale output, select "ripwin32_gray8.plt". For color output, select "ripwin32_rgb24.plt".
When using a RIP printer driver file, you can assign a transparency value (1-100%) to polygons in the pen table; a fill pattern; rounded, square, or flat line caps; and beveled, mitred, or flat line joins.
A progress indicator is displayed while the RIP is running.
Utilities
A pair of utilities in MicroStation V8 make it easy for you to keep your data clean and package it for use in other environments.
Create Package wizard

MicroStation V8 includes the Create Package wizard (Utilities > Packager), which enables you to create project archives.
DGN file cleanup

The Design File Cleanup dialog box (Utilities > Data Cleanup) is used to easily clean up instances of the following in the open DGN file: Duplicate elements where two elements of the same type have the same location and geometry Overlapping elements where two elements partially overlap one another Gaps where an endpoint of one element is unacceptably far from another element
339

Interoperability Enhancements
Interoperability Enhancements
MicroStation V8, with its new DGN file format (see page 3-69), provides unsurpassed interoperability with applications using the DWG file format.
Interoperability with DWG File Format

MicroStation V8 natively reads and writes both the MicroStation V8 DGN file format (see page 3-69) and the DWG/DXF file formats thus enabling lossless data sharing. You can also directly reference models in DWG files from models in DGN files. MicroStation V8s native DWG support extends to files created with AutoCAD 2002.
The MicroStation V8 DGN file format introduces various data constructs that make data sharing that much more seamless for example, hatches and region, and meshes and indexed polygons. MicroStation/J (v7) data concepts such as text, tags (or ATTRIBs), dimensions, levels, cells (or BLOCKs), etc. are expanded. In fact, the MicroStation V8 DGN file format is a superset of the v7 MicroStation and DWG file formats, collectively.
In MicroStation V8s DWG Restriction workmode, certain functionality is disabled by default in order to restrict MicroStation V8 to creating only information that can be stored in DWG format. When you open a DWG file, DWG Restriction mode is automatically enabled
Open and save options

MicroStation V8 has numerous options that enable you to precisely control the manner in which DWG files are opened and saved and DGN files are saved. These options include the capability to remap design data (see page 3-41) to different values. While these options provide you with the much flexibility, the default settings should produce satisfactory results in many cases.
Batch Conversion utility

You can convert individual files, or entire directories of files from any of the
340

Remapping design data
design file formats supported by MicroStation V8 to any other supported format using the Batch Convert dialog box (Utilities > Batch Converter).
Remapping design data

When you save or batch convert files to different formats, you can control how design data such as levels, symbology, fonts, or cell names are remapped to different values. This remapping functionality is useful for:
file format conversion standards conversion bulk processing
Operational Enhancements
MicroStation V8 has operational enhancements including the ability to open files from previous editions of MicroStation and save as either a MicroStation/J (v7)or V8-format DGN file. The working units setup procedure for seed DGN files is enhanced. Additionally, the Undo buffer is unlimited in size.
341

Migrating v7 design files

MicroStation V8 opens design files from all previous editions of MicroStation. When you open a v7 design file, you have the option of either upgrading the file to MicroStation V8 DGN file format (see page 3-69) or opening it read-only. If you want to work with v7 design files in MicroStation V8 but need to maintain backward compatibility, you have two choices:
Upgrade newly opened v7 design files to the new format, but save them when done making changes as v7 files in which the graphic representation is maintained. Configure MicroStation V8 to operate in V7 workmode, in which MicroStation V8 permits the opening of v7 design files for write access but disables functionality that is not backward-compatible.
Options for saving V8 DGN files as v7 design files

You can use the Save As V7 Options dialog box to map MicroStation V8 DGN file format (see page 3-69) data constructs, such as levels above 63, fonts that are new to MicroStation V8, cells that are too large or have names that are too long, etc., to v7 analogues, and to select other options that influence backward compatibility.
To save the open DGN file as a v7-format design file

1. Choose File > Save As. The Save As dialog box opens. 2. From the Select Format To Save option menu, choose MicroStation V7 DGN Files (*.dgn). 3. (Optional) To select save options, click Options and use the controls in the Save As V7 Options dialog box. When done, click OK to return to the Save As dialog box. 4. Specify the name and location of the new v7-format file using
342

the standard dialog box controls. 5. Click OK.
Setting up and using V7 workmode

The following capabilities are disabled in V7 workmode: view group creation level creation model creation 3D references in 2D design files reference associations references to models created in V8 DGN files references to models created in DWG files
To enable V7 workmode
1. From the Workspace menu, choose Configuration. The Configuration dialog box opens. 2. In the View/Modify All Configuration Variables list box, select MS_OPENV7. 3. Click Edit. The Edit Configuration File dialog box opens. 4. In the New Value field, type 3. 5. Click OK to return to the Configuration dialog box. 6. From the File menu of the Configuration dialog box, choose Save. 7. To close the Configuration dialog box, click OK. 8. Exit and restart MicroStation. To reenable the default workmode, DGN Capacity, set MS_OPENV7 to 0. Follow the above steps, except in step 4, type 0 instead of 3.
343

To ensure that the project data conforms with the project requirements, the system administrator or project manager should specify the workmode at the project level.
Batch migration
In addition to the Batch Conversion utility (see page 3-40), MicroStation V8 provides a second utility for upgrading a set of v7 design files and/or cell libraries to V8 DGN format. To use this utility to upgrade design files, choose File > Upgrade Files to V8 in the MicroStation Manager dialog box (File > Close). To use this utility to upgrade cell libraries, choose File > Upgrade Files to V8 in the Cell Library dialog box (Element > Cells).
To explicitly specify the working unit setup for upgraded files, you must specify the desired working units in a text file. During the upgrade, if the unit labels in a file being processed are identical to those in a custom unit definition, MicroStation V8 creates the V8 DGN file with the specified units.
For the syntax and examples of custom unit definitions, see the sample unit definition file, "units.def", which is installed in the Workspace\System\data directory.
The configuration variable MS_CUSTOMUNITDEF defines the location of the
344

Setting up working units
unit definition file. In MicroStation V8 as delivered, MS_CUSTOMUNITDEF is set to the installed sample file, "units.def". All of the unit definitions in that file are on lines that begin with the # character that is, commented out so even if you do not modify the file or redefine MS_CUSTOMUNITDEF, none of the sample unit definitions are applied by default.
The Batch Conversion utility (see page 3-40) has more options for controlling the upgrading of V7 files than the MicroStation Manager-based utility and is therefore likely to yield better results.
Setting up working units
With the implementation of the MicroStation V8 DGN file format (see page 3-69), MicroStation V8 now uses IEEE 64-bit floating point storage. This allows for a high degree of accuracy and a working area roughly 2 million times larger in each axis than v7. As a result, there are different factors to consider when setting up working units and their significance is greatly decreased.
The Working Units category of the DGN File Settings dialog box (Settings > Design File) contains controls for adjusting working unit settings. These settings are typically stored in seed DGN files and not adjusted in DGN files derived from seed files.
Working Units category controls
MicroStation V8 references a standard table of unit ratios for example, 1 foot:12 inches. This table enables you to choose master units and
345

Design History
sub-units by name. Therefore, you can change working units (master/sub) without affecting the size of existing geometry. The Advanced Unit Settings dialog box is used to change the storage resolution. This does affect the size of existing elements. You should consult with your site administrator before changing the storage resolution settings. In this dialog box, the Resolution is the worst case accuracy, which occurs only at the very edge of a (very large) working area. Actual accuracy is many millions of times better when drawing near the origin of the design plane, which is the usual situation. In almost all cases, this setting need not be changed. The Custom Units button is enabled if either Custom MU or Custom SU is chosen as a Master Unit or Sub Unit, respectively. Select Custom Units to define the custom unit ratio for each custom unit. Note that the ratios are defined in units that MicroStation V8 understands (known units).
You can explicitly specify working unit settings when batch-migrating v7 design files to MicroStation V8 DGN file format see Batch migration (see page 3-44).
Design History
The Design History feature of MicroStation V8 enables you to restore revisions of a DGN file. A revision is a milestone in the development of a design. When you create a revision, Design History captures the state of the DGN file at that moment. To document the revision, Design History records your user ID and the current time and date, and it allows you to enter a comment.
346

Unlimited Undo
Design History is an optional feature of MicroStation V8. When enabled, Design History stores historical information inside the DGN file. When you initialize a DGN files Design History, the file grows to record a snapshot of the design. As you add revisions, the file continues to grow to hold the deltas.
Unlimited Undo
MicroStation V8 supports unlimited undo. Because the Undo buffer is unlimited in size, the Undo Buffer setting is removed from the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences).
Batch Process utility

You can run key-in scripts against individual DGN files, or entire directories of files using the Batch Process dialog box (Utilities > Batch Process). This provides the means to automate global file modifications that may become necessary on occasion as a result of changing project requirements or company standards.
347

Usability Enhancements
Usability Enhancements
MicroStation V8 has a revised user interface to make it more intuitive and easier to use. The online help system now uses Microsoft HTML Help, contextual (right-click) menus are added for many operations, the Tool Settings window can be hidden until needed, and the main menu bar can be moved (floated) to a more convenient location.
DGN file preview

When opening a MicroStation V8 DGN file, you can preview its contents.
Selecting a MicroStation V8 DGN file in the MicroStation Manager or Open dialog box causes the contents of the view in which an element was last placed or operated upon to appear in the preview box to the right. When you select a v7 design file, the V8 logo appears in the preview box; when you select a DWG file, nothing appears there.
348

Online help
Online help
MicroStation V8 is upgraded to use Microsoft HTML Help, the standard online help system for the Windows platform. With HTML Help, help topics are displayed in a standard window; a Web browser is not used.
Choosing Help > Tool Index, or clicking the Tool Index link in the Help windows table of contents frame, opens the Tool Index window. This window lists all MicroStation V8 tools in alphabetical order. You can search for a tool by entering its name or part of its name in the Find field and clicking Apply. Clicking the Reset button clears the search parameters and restores the entire tool list.
Automatically hiding the Tool Settings window (PopSet)

You can automatically prevent the display of the Tool Settings window when you are finished adjusting its controls. This capability is called PopSet.
Using PopSet is a great way to reclaim valuable screen real estate and reduce pointer movement.
PopSet, which is disabled by default, is indicated by the red indicator light in the Primary Tools tool box. While PopSet is enabled, the Tool Settings window remains visible while the pointer is over
the PopSet indicator light the selected tools icon the Tool Settings window itself
Moving the pointer over a view window hides the Tool Settings window after a period of time defined in the PopSet Properties dialog box. The Tool Settings window reappears when you
Move the pointer over the PopSet dialog box. Select a different tool icon or move the pointer over the
349

Floating main menu bar
currently selected tools icon. Press Ctrl, spacebar when the pointer is inside a view window. (Pressing Ctrl, spacebar again hides it.)
To disable or reenable PopSet

1. In the Primary Tools tool box, click the PopSet indicator light. If you are disabling PopSet, the indicator light changes from green to red. If you are re-enabling PopSet, the indicator light changes from red to green. Certain aspects of PopSets behavior are adjustable in the PopSet Properties dialog box. To open this box, right-click the PopSet indicator light and choose Properties from the pop-up menu.
Floating main menu bar

The main menu bar can be undocked (detached) from its default location just beneath the MicroStation V8 application windows title bar and floated anywhere within the application window. Undocking and docking of the main menu bar works in the same manner as with tool frames and tool boxes.
Customizing the view control pop-up menu

Using the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize), you can customize the pop-up menu in view windows. This is the menu that opens when you hold down the Shift key and press the Reset button while the pointer is in a view window.
Showing and hiding tools and view controls

You can selectively disable and enable individual tools and view controls in tool boxes.
350

List boxes
To hide or show a tool

1. Open the tool box that contains the tool icon. 2. Position the pointer within the tool box and right-click. A pop-up menu opens. Enabled tools are indicated with checkmarks. 3. Choose the pop-up menu item for the tool you want to hide or show.
List boxes
List box columns in many dialog boxes can be sorted or resized.
Preferences
The Preferences dialog box categories are rearranged to make it easier to find preferences.
Mouse preferences
Mouse wheel preferences are in the "Mouse" category in the Preferences dialog box.
Menu items
The following sections list changes in the menu structure for MicroStation V8. The Workspace menu is unchanged.
File menu changes

Choosing Raster Manager opens the Raster Manager dialog box, which is used to attach and manage raster images. Choosing Models opens the Models dialog box, which is used to create and manage models in the active DGN file.
351

Menu items
The menu item Import > DWG/DXF is removed, as MicroStation V8 natively reads (and writes) DWG files. The menu item Import > VersaCAD 386 is removed. The menu item Export > DWG/DXF is removed, as MicroStation V8 natively writes (and reads) DWG files. The menu item Export > QuickVision is removed. The menu item Export > RIB is removed. Choosing Properties opens the Properties dialog box, which is used to review the open DGN files general properties and usage statistics and change the files design properties, such as title, subject, and client Icons highlight the New, Open, Save, Models, Print, and Send menu items.
Edit menu changes

The menu item Object Links is renamed Links. The menu item Outline OLE Objects is removed. Choosing Update Links updates embedded or linked objects in the open DGN file. Icons highlight the Undo, Redo, Cut, Copy, Paste, and Find/Replace Text menu items.

The menu item Attributes is removed. The Attributes tool box, which is docked to the menu bar in MicroStation V8 as delivered, effectively replaces the Element Attributes dialog box. The menu item B-splines is renamed B-spline and 3D. Choosing this menu item opens the B-spline and 3D dialog box. This dialog box contains controls used to adjust 3D drawing settings as well as B-spline settings.
352

Menu items
Choosing Line Style > Custom and Line Style > Edit open the Line Styles and Line Style Editor dialog boxes, respectively. The menu item SmartSolids is removed. The menu item Text is renamed Text Styles as choosing it opens the Text Styles dialog box, which is used to create and modify text styles and to set the active text style.
Settings menu changes

Settings menu changes are as follows: The Tool Settings menu item is relocated from the Tools menu. Settings menu items Level > Symbology, Level > Names, and Level > Usage are removed. In MicroStation V8, their functions are superceded by the Level Display dialog box (Settings > Level > Display) and the Level Manager dialog box (Settings > Level > Manager). Choosing Rendering > Particle Tracing opens the Particle Tracing dialog box, which is used to adjust settings for rendering using particle tracing.
353

Menu items
Particle Tracing dialog box displaying standard settings.
Choosing Settings > Snaps > AccuSnap opens the AccuSnap Settings dialog box, which is used to enable and disable AccuSnap and adjust its settings. There are changes to the names by which several snap modes are identified in the Settings > Snaps submenu.
Tools menu changes

Tools menu changes are as follows: Choosing Attributes opens the Attributes tool box, which is used to adjust the active level and symbology settings and to apply those settings to selected elements. This tool box supercedes the Element Attributes dialog box. The submenu Surface Modeling is relocated between the menu items References and View Control. The menu item Tool Boxes is relocated to near the bottom of the menu. The Tool Settings menu item is removed. If the Tool Settings window happens to be closed, to reopen it, simply select a tool that has tool settings. The Visualization Tools submenu is renamed Visualization. In the Visualization Tools submenu, the submenu item Rendering Tools is renamed Rendering. In the Visualization Tools submenu, the submenu item Animation Tools is renamed Animation. The Tool Settings menu item is relocated to the Settings menu.
354

Menu items
Utilities menu changes

Utilities menu changes are as follows: The menu item MicroStation Link is renamed Connect Web Browser. The menu item Text Glossary is removed. Choosing Render > Particle Trace generates particle tracing solutions. Choosing Data Cleanup opens the Design File Cleanup dialog box, which is used to identify duplicate elements, overlapping elements and/or gaps between elements in the open DGN file. Choosing Packager opens the Create Package wizard, which is used to create a project archive or package. Choosing Macro > Macros opens the Macros dialog box, which is used to used to create, run, edit, and debug Visual Basic (VBA) macros. The dialog box used to run, edit, or debug MicroStation BASIC macros is opened by choosing Macro > MicroStation BASIC. Choosing Macro > Visual Basic Editor starts the Microsoft Visual Basic application. Choosing Batch Converter opens the Batch Convert dialog box, which is used to convert individual files, or entire directories of files from any of the design file formats supported by MicroStation V8 to any other supported format. Choosing Batch Process opens the Batch Process dialog box, which is used to create and run key-in scripts on individual files or entire directories of files. Choosing Macro > Project Manager opens the VBA Project Manager dialog box, which serves as MicroStation V8s integrated development environment for VBA. The menu item Macros is renamed Macro > MicroStation BASIC. The menu item Create Macro is renamed Macro > Create BASIC Macro. The menu item MDL Applications is relocated to the bottom of the Utilities menu. The User Command submenu and all of its items are removed.
With the introduction of Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) in MicroStation V8, the User Command (UCM) macro language is now obsolete. However, to ease transition difficulties, the UCM interpreter
355

Menu items
has not been removed from MicroStation V8. User commands (UCMs) generally fall into one of two categories: those that drive MicroStation by simulating user input or key-ins, and those that manipulate elements via the DGNBUF memory variables. UCMs in the latter category are hard coded with element memory locations that are incorrect for the new element layouts in MicroStation V8, and they will generate an error if you attempt to run them. However, UCMs in the former category will load properly and likely continue to work with MicroStation V8. In both cases, though, there are better and more efficient techniques for accomplishing the same results with VBA, and you are encouraged to convert UCMs to Visual Basic macros as soon as is practical. The User Command subsystems will be removed from a future release of MicroStation.
Window menu changes

Window menu changes are as follows: The menu item Views > Dialog opens or closes the View Groups window. The menu item Groups is removed.
Help menu changes

Help menu changes are as follows: Choosing Tool Index opens the Tool Index window. This part of the online help system makes it easy for you to find help on individual tools. The menu item How to Use Help is removed. Information about using online help is present in this help document. The menu item Product Support is removed from this menu, but remains in the Help menu in the MicroStation Manager dialog box. Choosing MicroStation on the Web opens your default Web browser to Bentleys MicroStation on the Web site. This site features MicroStation
356

Miscellaneous usability enhancements
news, tips, and training information. An icon highlights this menu item.

The following sections describe miscellaneous usability enhancements.
Tree controls
Several dialog boxes in MicroStation V8, most notably the Level Manager and References dialog boxes, employ collapsible and expandable tree controls. Tree controls are used in dialog boxes to navigate settings related to hierarchical objects. The Help window also employs tree controls; these controls are in the table of contents frame.
Fence usage
In addition to the significant production enhancements for fence operations, MicroStation V8 has the following fence usability enhancements: MicroStation V8 provides visual feedback identifying the current fence mode in the fence item of the status bar. You can change the fence mode from the same control in the status bar.
Measuring
Measuring tools display the result of their most recent usage that is, the last measurement in the Tool Settings window. These values can be selected and copied to the Clipboard.
357

Primary Tools and Attributes tool boxes

The Primary Tools tool box is split into two tool boxes Primary Tools and Attributes.
Selecting tools
You can activate (select) any MicroStation tool from the Help window. For example, if the Measure Length tools help topic is displayed in the Help window, clicking the tool icon image or the link text Use it! below the icon image opens the Measure tool box, if it is not already open, and selects the Measure Length tool.
Status bar messages

The Message Center window enables you to review error, warning, and information messages previously displayed in the status bar, including messages displayed too briefly to have been read.
To open the Message Center window

1. Click the Message Center indicator icon. This icon is located just to the right of the left-hand section of the status bar in which messages are originally displayed.
358

The Message Center indicator in the status bar displays an icon indicating the type of message displayed since the Message Center window was last opened. The following table describes the message types and icons in order from most severe to least severe.
Message type error warning information Icon description stop sign yellow triangle blue circle containing i
You can change the maximum number of messages saved for display in the Message Center window. The default is 50.
To change the maximum number of messages saved for display in the Message Center window
1. Right-click either the Message Center indicator icon in the status bar or the Message Center window itself. A pop-up menu opens. 2. From the pop-up menu, choose Properties. The Message Center Properties dialog box opens. 3. Key in the number of messages to save in the Number of Messages field. 4. Click OK. You can save all messages in a text file.
To save all messages saved for display in the Message Center to a text file
1. Right-click either the Message Center indicator icon in the status
359

bar or the Message Center window itself. A pop-up menu opens. 2. From the pop-up menu, choose Save Messages. The Save Messages To A File dialog box opens. This is a standard file selection dialog box. 3. Use the controls in the Save Messages To A File dialog box to set the path and filename for the text file. 4. Click OK. The text file is created. Turning on Display Debug Messages in the Message Center Properties dialog box enables the inclusion of debug messages in the Message Center window. The indicator icon for debug messages is an image of gears. Debug messages are least in severity among the message types.
DGN file properties and usage statistics

You can review the open DGN files general properties and usage statistics and change the files design properties, such as title, subject, and client, using the Properties dialog box (File > Properties).
The title property is distinct from the filename in the file system. The latter is a general property and is displayed on the dialog boxs General tab.
360

Key-in window
The Key-in window is enhanced. You can more easily recall previous key-ins and access individual MDL application command tables. Furthermore, you can access the keyword list boxes while the Key-in window is docked.
Icons
Throughout MicroStation V8, tool icon artwork is enhanced for greater legibility and relevancy.
Included in MicroStation V8 are several visualization enhancements. Many were previously released for MicroStation/J through Bentley SELECTservices Online.
Particle tracing
This is an easy-to-use technology that provides photo-realistic lighting solutions. It is an alternative to traditional radiosity solving, with significantly lower memory requirements. It is particularly well suited to visualizing very large designs. Particle tracing solutions are computed directly to disk, instead of in memory, allowing solutions to be generated for designs of virtually any size.
Like radiosity, particle tracing solutions are view independent. Once computed, you can quickly redisplay the design from any vantage point, making particle tracing very useful for creating animations and walkthroughs.
Particle tracing works by calculating the paths of light particles as they are emitted from light sources and are reflected and transmitted throughout the scene. When ray traced, these lighting solutions provide an unprecedented level of photorealism, combining reflections, refraction and other caustic lighting effects, such as light reflected by mirrors or focused through lenses.
361

Persistent solutions and the rendering workflow
Image ray traced with no particle tracing solution present, displays only specular highlights
Persistent solutions and the rendering workflow

Ray tracing, radiosity, and particle tracing solutions are no longer cleared when you render a view with a non-photorealistic render mode such as Phong, or Smooth. Solutions remain active in memory until you close the DGN file, manually clear the solution with the Clear Solution button in the Render settings dialog box, or create a new solution. This means that, after rendering a view (or material preview), updating a rendered view (including accelerated view), or saving images to disk, you are still able to redisplay an existing solution (formerly known as a rendering database).
Since photo-realistic solutions are kept in memory, for these rendering modes you have the choice of Creating a New Solution or Displaying the Current Solution (if any). Additionally, particle tracing and radiosity rendering modes have a further option that lets you add to the current solution. That is, you can add more shots (radiosity) or particles (particle tracing).
Render tool enhancements

When you select Ray Trace, Radiosity, or Particle Trace, as the Render Mode in the Render tools dialog box, additional icons appear, which let you quickly select various actions, relevant to the selected render mode. As well, a Settings button
362

Material Editor enhancements
lets you open the settings dialog box for the selected render mode, while a Clear Solution button lets you clear from memory, a currently loaded solution.
Render tool settings for Ray Trace, Radiosity and Particle Trace.
Material Editor enhancements

Significant enhancements have been made to the Material Editor, both in its interface and its workflow. These include consolidating all material settings into the main dialog box, and automatically updating the material without having to click Replace. Additionally, you can import materials from other material palettes.
363

Applying material definitions in attached references
Applying material definitions in attached references

You can apply material definitions to elements in references. If you try to apply a material to a reference element that already has a material assigned, the selected element remains unchanged. The material, however, still is applied to elements matching the selected elements color and level both in the master model and other references. When you apply material definitions from a master model to elements in a reference, the material applies only when rendering the master model. Neither the reference nor its material definitions are changed.
Sky openings
Using the Define Light tool, you can add a Sky Opening light, which can be used with ray tracing, radiosity, and particle tracing. This is not a true light in the traditional sense, but acts as a control when using Solar, Distant and Sky lights. A sky opening is used to generate more efficient solutions for indoor scenes lit with sky or sun light through an opening such as a skylight, window, or door. Processing time is reduced because testing for shadows is carried out in the directions of the sky openings, as opposed to testing the entire sky.
You place the Sky Opening the same way that you place an Area Light. That is, you first define a (polygonal) shape for the geometry. You then select Create in the Define Light tool, select the geometry, and then select the direction that the opening shines light. For example, an opening representing a window would point toward the inside of the room. That is, the direction the sunlight travels into the room.
Dynamic lighting
When working with accelerated rendered views, changes made to lighting appear automatically, without having to manually refresh the view. For example, when you increase the Flashbulb Intensity in the Global Lighting dialog box, the effects take place on the screen as you are adjusting the dialog box settings.
In addition, when manipulating lights interactively, for example, targeting a light source, you see the effects of the changing light as you dynamically reposition the light source.
364

Graphical Define North
The Cell Scale setting (in the Define Light dialog box) controls the size of the construction light.
Graphical Define North

Graphical Define North provides an easy method to orient the DGN file for accurate rendering of solar lighting.
In the Global Lighting you can set the True North direction (degrees from x-axis). You can define the direction of North graphically or if you know it, you can key in the value relative to the x-axis.
Animation motion blur

When creating an animation script, you can apply motion blur the effect of blurring objects as they move on the screen, giving them a smooth and more realistic appearance of motion.
Solar time stamp

You can display the current Solar Time and Date information while rendering a view. This lets you produce solar studies, for example, in which the time and date appear. A special cell, SLRTIM, is used to produce the time stamp. This cell contains enter data fields into which you place variables that are replaced with the required information during rendering. Added to this is a new setting for duration, Days, which lets you run a solar study over a number of days.
Save Panorama
If QuickTime is installed (must be full install), the Save Panorama dialog box (Utilities > Image > Save Panorama) makes available the following options:
QuickTimeVR output Image objects (camera spins 360 degrees around the target): Sphere (altitude ranges from +90 to -90), Top Hemisphere (altitude ranges
365

Multi-pass anti-aliasing
from 0 to 90), Cylinder (all views from a fixed altitude), and Custom (user sets the minimum and maximum altitude). In all cases, the camera spins 360 degrees around the target.
Multi-pass anti-aliasing
MicroStation V8 performs multi-pass antialiasing of smooth shaded radiosity and particle tracing solutions.
Predefining light sources

You can create predefined light sources that you may then select for use with the Define Light tool. Provided with MicroStation is "lightlist.dgn", a DGN file that contains a selection of predefined light sources. This file is installed in the Workspace\system\cell directory. The location of this, and any other DGN file containing predefined lights, is defined by the configuration variable MS_LIGHTLIST.
Usability enhancements
You can open the Global Lighting dialog box by clicking the Global button in the Define Light settings window.
The Global Lighting dialog box indicates when there is no Sunlight because the sun is below the horizon.
In the Animation Settings tool box, the first icon opens the Animation Producer dialog box, and the second icon opens the Animation KeyFrames dialog box.
366

Other enhancements
Other enhancements
Included in the many other enhancements to the visualization tools are the following:
Render All Objects this setting is assumed on for radiosity and particle trace solutions, regardless of the actual setting. View Cameras and stroking of elements to ensure consistent stroking of elements for view-independent lighting solutions, cameras are temporarily disabled when generating the geometry for radiosity and particle trace solutions. They are re-enabled for display. This applies also to ray tracing when Render All Objects is enabled. Storage of radiosity and particles tracing solutions these are stored in a compressed form, using less disk space. Saving and loading of solutions displays a progress bar and can be aborted.
The v7 configuration variable MS_GRAPHICSACCELERATOR is not applicable to MicroStation V8.
Raster File Management Enhancements

Raster Manager (File > Raster Manager) is used to manage reference raster file attachments. As the successor to Image Manager, Raster Manager provides better image output and the ability to retrieve stored print information.
Visual Basic for Applications

MicroStation V8 implements Microsofts Visual Basic for Applications (VBA), including, but not limited to:
Calling between MDL, VBA, and native code
367

Visual Basic for Applications
VBA as a prototyping tool Exposing existing MDL code to COM, etc.
Choosing Utilities > Macro > Project Manager opens the VBA Project Manager dialog box, which serves as MicroStation V8s integrated development environment (IDE) for VBA.
Choosing Utilities > Macro > Macros opens the Macros dialog box, which is used to create, run, debug, and delete VBA macros.
Choosing Utilities > Macro > Visual Basic Editor starts Microsofts Visual Basic application.
368

MicroStation V8 DGN File Format
For MicroStation V8-specific information about developing VBA macros, see the help document MicroStation VBA Documentation in MicroStation V8s Documentation program group.

The MicroStation V8 DGN file format is a superset of both the MicroStation/J (v7) and DWG file formats.
Although prior versions of MicroStation performed all calculations in IEEE double precision floating point, many design coordinates were stored as 32-bit integers. In contrast, MicroStation V8 also stores design
369

coordinates in double precision floating point.
The concept of establishing the DGN file coordinate system by defining master/sub/positional units is retained mainly because it makes the MicroStation V8 conversion process easier and it retains equity in seed files, references, etc. However, in MicroStation V8, there is a great deal of resolution between positional units. This makes DGN file setup considerably less important, because the accuracy in terms of master units is nearly unaffected by unit setup. The use of double precision floating coordinates also gives a design plane that is approximately 2 million times larger in each axis.
A MicroStation V8 DGN file is composed of one or more models. A model is a container for elements.
The MicroStation V8 DGN file format removes all file format-based constraints that were present in previous versions of MicroStation. Here are the specifics:
There is no limit on the number of levels per DGN file. Each level is named and stored as an element. The maximum physical size of the DGN file is limited only by the operating system (the Windows NT limit is 4 GB). The maximum size of a single element is 128 KB. There is no limit on the maximum size of a cell. Cell names are limited to approximately 500 characters. There is no limit to the number of references that can be attached to a DGN file. A line string, shape, or point curve can have up to 5000 vertices. There is no limit to the number of components in a complex chain or complex shape. There is no limit to the number of graphic groups in a DGN file. The fence is parallel to the view in which it is placed. A single line of text can contain 65,535 characters. There is no limit on the maximum size of a text node. There is no limit to the number of text nodes in a DGN file.
370

Each element has a unique 64-bit identifier that does not change through the life-cycle of the element. Each element has a time stamp that indicates the time of the most recent change.
371
372
System Requirements
This chapter lists the hardware and software considerations for running MicroStation.
Installation Considerations
For installation instructions, see the QuickInstall Guide section of the MicroStation ReadMe ( "readme_microstation.chm") delivered in the install directory of the product.
Hardware and Software Requirements

You can install MicroStation only on a system with a CD-ROM drive or access to the Internet.
Following is the recommended system configuration to run MicroStation:

Hardware Intel or AMD Athlon processor, 2.0 GHz or faster (Pentium III processor minimum) Pentium Software One of the following Microsoft Windows operating systems:
Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or higher Windows XP Professional
512 MB RAM (128 MB minimum)
Microsoft Internet Explorer v5.5 or higher (you do not need to change your default Web browser). Must have 128-bit Cipher Strength to use digital rights technologies.
41
System Requirements
Output devices
Hardware Free disk space:
400 MB to install 10% of disk capacity to run

3-button mouse, wheel mouse, digitizing tablet, or compatible pointing device Keyboard DirectX 9-compatible video card with 128 MB RAM or higher Dual 17-inch or larger monitors or single 21-inch or larger monitor
Bentley does not endorse any hardware peripherals. This includes printers, display adapters and input devices. Using a digitizing tablet requires a vendor-supplied WINTAB driver or Bentleys Digitizer Tablet Interface (BDTI) the latter is a MicroStation installation option, which must be explicitly selected even in a Complete installation. MicroStation uses existing Windows display drivers. Consult your display adapter vendor for the latest video drivers and for video configuration information. Dual screen graphics are supported with vendor-supplied drivers for Windows NT 4. Multi-monitor configurations are supported with Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Me, and Windows 98.
Output devices
MicroStation supports the generation of printed output in formats supported by most plotting/printing devices. There are several types of printer driver (.plt) files delivered with MicroStation:
generic templates ( "cal907.plt", "hpgl2.plt", etc.) customized driver files ( "cal524XX.plt", "hp650c.plt", etc.) "printer.plt", which works in conjunction with the Windows system printer driver provided by the printer vendor. Effectively, MicroStation
42
System Requirements
Output devices
works with all printers supported by Windows. MicroStation can use a raster image processor (RIP) to drive the printing process. A gray-scale RIP printer driver, "ripwin32_gray8.plt", and a color RIP driver, "ripwin32_rgb24.plt", are provided.
All delivered MicroStation printer drivers refer to drivers that create plot information in industry-recognized formats (such as HPGL/2, HPGL/RTL, ESC/P, TIFF, and CGM). If a specific printer driver does not exist for the printer that you are using, you might need to create one.
To create a printer driver file, modify one of the delivered generic template drivers that produce output in a format that your printer supports and save it to the Workspace\Standards\plotdrv directory.
43
44
Directory Structure
The directory structure for V8 makes updates easier and reduces the likelihood of overwriting data when reinstalling MicroStation.
The Home directory

The \Bentley\Home folder provides a local storage location for some Bentley product-specific data that is unique to a computer or workstation. The location of this folder is defined by the variable _USTN_HOMEROOT (by default, it is at the same level as ..\Program\, ..\Workspace\, ..\Documentation\).
User Preference Files and dfltuser.cfg, the file containing the current workspace name, are created and stored in the \Bentley\Home\prefs folder by default. It is highly recommended not to share User Preference Files between users. Although multiple users can and should utilize the same workspace and user configuration files over a network, \Bentley\Home\ should reside on each local computer or workstation.
The Documentation directory

This directory contains the new product documentation files.
Directory Name Bentley Documentation Contains all program and language documentation files Description
The Program directory

This directory contains the files necessary for MicroStation to operate in its
51
Directory Structure
The Workspace directory
default configuration. Files installed in this directory include MicroStation system files, licensing files and, if installed, Engineering Configuration system files, such as MicroStation GeoGraphics or Bentley Model Streaming executable files.
Directory Name Bentley Program MicroStation config database docs jmdl mdl mdlapps mdlsys temp
The Workspace directory

The workspace directory is where users create and maintain standards and projects in a network environment.
User data files should be stored in the Workspace directory or in a shared network resource in order to share project data and develop, maintain and enforce the use of drawing standards and the appearance of MicroStation on the desktop. Within the Workspace directory are:
Projects directory: where project-specific data is typically stored. Standards directory: where the CAD Manager or System Administrator stores and maintains corporate standards. Project data that can be used on multiple projects can be moved to this directory. System directory: updated by Bentley, user data placed in this directory will be overwritten by subsequent software installations or updates.
52
Directory Structure
Sample project directory structure

Projects should be created in the \Workspace\projects directory. MicroStation provides a set of sample projects in the \Workspace\projects\examples directory.
Users can create projects using their standard naming conventions. These files can be installed anywhere on the network by setting the system environment variable _ustn_workspace root before starting MicroStation.
Directory Name Bentley Workspace interfaces fkeys MicroStation Description Default Default Default Function key menus Default Resource file(s) default mde newuser Projects Examples Architectural Borders Civil General Mapping Mechanical Structural Visualization Resource file(s) Resource file(s) Resource file(s) Default Default Architectural files and subdirectories Border files not specific to any application Civil files and subdirectories General files and subdirectories Mapping files and subdirectories Mechanical drafting files and subdirectories Structural files and subdirectories Visualization files and subdirectories
53
Directory Structure
Directory Name untitled dgnlib data dgn out seed symb Standards dgnlib data dgn macros materials mdlapps plotdrivers seed SPC symb tables VBA Description The seed project to copy Project untitled cell libraries Project untitled data files Project untitled DGN files Project untitled out directory Project untitled seed files Project untitled resource files Corporate standards (shared among projects) Corporate standard cell libraries (shared among projects) Corporate standard data files (shared among projects) Corporate standard dgn files (shared among projects) Corporate standard macros (shared among projects) Corporate standard materials (shared among projects) Corporate standard mdlapps (shared among projects) Corporate standard plotdriver files (shared among projects) Corporate standard seed files (shared among projects) Default location of security configuration variables Corporate standard symb files (shared among projects) Corporate standard table files (shared among projects) Visual Basic files
54
Directory Structure
Directory Name System dgnlib data image macros bump pattern menus plotdrivers seed symb Description Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory. Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory. Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory. Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory. Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory. Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory. Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory. Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory. Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory. Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory.
tables
Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory. Bentley standards, do not place user data in this directory. Removed in V8.
VBA Users
Visual Basic files User configuration files
55
56
Fundamentals
In this chapter, you will find procedures concerning the most basic operations in MicroStation, including:
starting MicroStation (see page 6-1) working with DGN files (see page 6-2) using MicroStation Manager (see page 6-12) exiting MicroStation (see page 6-19) entering graphical input (see page 6-19) using drawing tools (see page 6-23) key-ins (see page 6-40) preparing to draw (see page 6-44) models (see page 6-50) using online help (see page 6-58)
Starting MicroStation
There are several ways to initiate MicroStation. When you finish installing MicroStation, restart your system before starting MicroStation for the first time.
61
Fundamentals
Working with DGN Files
To start MicroStation
1. In the MicroStation program group, double-click the MicroStation icon. or In Windows Explorer, double-click a DGN file icon (with the extension ".dgn"). or Drag a DGN file icon from Windows Explorer and drop it on the MicroStation icon. or In the Windows Explorer, double-click the icon for the file, "ustation.exe".

A MicroStation document file is called a DGN file. A DGN file is composed of one or more models (see page 6-49), each of which is represented using elements such as lines, arcs, and shapes. MicroStations File menu has items for creating, opening, and saving DGN files. These file management operations and others can also be performed using the MicroStation Manager dialog box. See Using MicroStation Manager on page 6-12.
62
Fundamentals
MicroStations File menu (Default workspace)
You cannot have more than one DGN file open at a time in MicroStation. If you open a DGN file when one is already open, MicroStation automatically closes the first file.
You can, however, view the models contained in other DGN files by attaching
63
Fundamentals
them as references to the active model in the open DGN file.
You can, however, view the models contained in other attached DGN files.
When you create a DGN file, MicroStation copies one of the provided templates or seed DGN files. The seed file is copied to a new filename that you specify in the New dialog box.
To open a DGN file

1. From the File menu, choose Open. The Open dialog box opens.
2. From the List Files of Type option menu, choose MicroStation DGN Files [*.dgn], if it is not already chosen. The default filter is CAD Files [*.dgn, *.dwg, *.dxf]. Only filenames with the extension .dgn display in the Files list box. 3. (Optional) To change the filter, select the desired filter
64
Fundamentals
from the option menu. For example, changing the filter to All Files [*.*] displays all files in the current directory. 4. (Optional) To select a different source disk drive, choose the desired drive from the Drives option menu. 5. (Optional) To select a different source directory, use the Directories list box. 6. In the Files list box, select the desired DGN file. or In the Files field, key in the name of the desired DGN file. 7. (Optional) To open the file for read-only access, in which design modifications cannot be saved to disk, turn on Read-Only. 8. Click OK. By default, a thumbnail of the DGN file is created when the DGN file is saved. This thumbnail displays in the preview window on the MicroStation Manager and Open dialog boxes. You can disable the creation of thumbnails by editing the MS_THUMBNAIL configuration variable to NONE (all uppercase). If a DGN file has never been opened in MicroStation, the Bentley insignia displays in the preview window. If the DGN file has been saved in the MicroStation format but no thumbnail was created, the MicroStation insignia displays in the preview field. For information about how to set MS_THUMBNAIL and other configuration variables, see Working With Configuration Variables in the Administrator Guide.
To create a DGN file and open it

1. From the File menu, choose New. The New dialog box opens.
65
Fundamentals
The default filter is MicroStation DGN Files [*.dgn].
The file specification for the default seed DGN file displays in the Seed File section. 2. (Optional) To change the filter, choose the corresponding item in the List Files of Type option menu. 3. (Optional) To select a different seed DGN file, click the Select button and use the Select Seed File dialog box (see Seed files in the Administrator Guide). 4. (Optional) To select a different destination disk drive, choose the desired drive from the Drives option menu. 5. (Optional) To select a different destination directory, use the Directories list box. 6. In the Files field, key in a name for the new DGN file. The file list is useful for ensuring that the new filename is not that of an existing file, or for selecting an existing filename and amending it. Although the extension .dgn is often used to indicate a MicroStation DGN file, any extension (or no extension) is acceptable. 7. Click OK.
66
Fundamentals
Compressing the open DGN file
To close the open DGN file

1. Open another DGN file. or From the File menu, choose Close (or press Ctrl-W). In the latter case, the MicroStation Manager dialog box opens.
Compressing the open DGN file

Compressing a DGN file reduces its size and clears MicroStations undo buffer.
Unless you are recording the open DGN files Design History (see page 6-10), compressing the file prevents previous changes from being undone.
To cause MicroStation to compress the open DGN file automatically when closing it, turn on Compress File on Exit in the Preferences dialog box (select Workspace > Preferences).
To compress the open DGN file

1. From the File menus Compress sub-menu, choose Design.
Saving and backing up your work

With regard to saving your work, MicroStation makes it easier on you than most other applications. In fact, MicroStation saves each change to the active model in the open DGN file that is, your drawing as it is made! You need only manually save changes to DGN file settings. See Preparing to Draw on page 6-44. User preference settings are available to change MicroStations operation with regard to saving design changes and DGN file settings changes.
67
Fundamentals
Save As and Backup

When you choose Save As from the File menu, you can save the open DGN file with a different name, in a different directory, on a different drive. MicroStation also closes the open DGN file and opens the newly saved DGN file. BACKUP is a MicroStation key-in. For an introduction to key-ins, see Key-ins on page 6-40. You can specify a different default so that keying in BACKUP creates a backup copy in a different directory, on a different drive, or even on a drive connected to a different system on your network. Here are some examples:
To, by default Save backups in the /temp directory Give backups the extension .tmp Set the configuration variable MS_BACKUP to /temp .tmp
Any part of a file specification included in a BACKUP key-in overrides the corresponding part of MS_BACKUP. For information about how to set MS_BACKUP and other configuration variables, see Working With Configuration Variables in the Administrator Guide.
68
Fundamentals
To save as
1. From the File menu, choose Save As. The Save As dialog box opens.
2. From the List Files of Type drop-down list, choose MicroStation V8 DGN Files [*.dgn], if it is not already chosen. 3. (Optional) To select a different destination drive or directory, use the Directories list box. 4. (Optional) To save the open DGN file under a different name, key in the new name in the Files field. 5. Click OK.
To make a backup copy of the open DGN file

1. From the Utilities menu, choose Key-in. The Key-in Window opens. 2. In the windows key-in field, key in BACKUP [file_specification]. FILE_SPECIFICATION is the path and directory in which to save the backup copy. If FILE_SPECIFICATION is omitted, a
69
Fundamentals
Recording Design History
copy of the open DGN file with the extension .bak is saved in the same directory as the open DGN file. The open DGN file is not closed.

When working on model(s) in a DGN file you have the option of creating a Design History for the DGN file. Typically, this will have been initialized when the file was created by the system administrator, so there may be no need to ever initialize the Design History for a file. With the Design History, you can track all of the changes to that DGN file by revision number, elements changed, revision type, and other parameters. Where necessary, you can restore elements to a prior state by a combination of undoing and redoing historic changes. Changes also can be tracked down to the element level.
To help track the revisions, each is identified with a revision number, the time and date, the author, and a description. When you Commit a revision, it records the difference between the current state of the model and the last revision saved.
Through the Design History, you can go back in time and restore objects that were deleted, move objects back to their original location, and remove objects that should have been removed.
610
Fundamentals
To initialize Design History

1. From the Tools menu, choose Design History. The Design History tool box opens. 2. (Optional) Dock the tool box. 3. In the Design History tool box, select the Initialize history for this file tool. This tool is available (enabled) only if history for the DGN has not been initialized previously. DGN files created from a seed file with Design History initialized will always have a design history.
When you make changes to the design, you can commit them as a revision. How often you commit revisions depends on your personal preference or organizational requirements. When changes are made to a DGN file, the Commit Changes button becomes active and remains so until the changes are committed.
To Commit changes as a revision

1. In the Design History tool box, click the Commit changes as a revision to this file icon, at far left. The Commit Changes dialog box opens. 2. In the text box, enter a note that explains the revisions. The Author of the changes is the person who committed the changes. 3. Click OK. The revision is added to the design history. Using the Design History dialog box, you can review all revisions previously made to a DGN file.
611
Fundamentals
Reviewing and modifying file properties
Reviewing and modifying file properties

You can review various DGN file properties in the Properties dialog box and change the Design Properties in the Summary tab. This tab contains text fields into which you can enter the following details:
Title Lets you give the file a title, as distinct from the filename in the file system. Subject Lets you put a description of the file contents. Client You can input the name of the client for whom the file was created. Keywords This field lets you put keywords that can be used later in a database, for setting search criteria. Comments Comments regarding the file can be put here. Manager Lets you record the name of the manager for the project.
As well as being accessible from inside MicroStation, much of the information in the Summary tab can be viewed in Windows Explorer, for example, by right-clicking the filename and selecting Properties. The file Properties dialog box opens when you select File > Properties, either in the MicroStation Manager dialog box or in MicroStations menu system. For more information about file properties, see Properties in the online Reference Guide.
Properties dialog box, displaying the Summary tab.
Using MicroStation Manager

When you start MicroStation without designating a DGN file to be opened
612
Fundamentals
automatically, the first dialog box you see is MicroStation Manager.
You can use MicroStation to perform a variety of useful file management functions including backing up, copying, deleting, compressing, merging, renaming, and opening design files, as well as creating new directories and backing up entire directories. These functions are performed by choosing items in MicroStation Managers File and Directory menus, which have features beyond those in other dialog boxes.
To create a new DGN file with MicroStation Manager

1. From MicroStation Managers File menu, choose New. The New dialog box opens. This is the same dialog box that is used to create a new DGN file in MicroStation when New is chosen from the File menu. See To create a DGN file and open it on page 6-5.
613
Fundamentals
To back up a file with MicroStation Manager

1. In MicroStation Managers Files list box, select the file. 2. From MicroStation Managers File menu, choose Copy. The Copy File dialog box opens. The filename of the selected file displays in the From: field, and <filename>.bak displays in the To: field. 3. Click OK to save a backup copy of the file as <filename>.bak. A backup copy of the file is made, the Copy File dialog box closes, and the selected file remains selected for opening in MicroStation Managers Files list box.
Backing up a file with MicroStation Manager
To open a copy of a file with MicroStation Manager

1. In MicroStation Managers Files list box, select the file. 2. From MicroStation Managers File menu, choose Copy. The Copy File dialog box opens. The filename of the selected file displays in the From: field, and <filename>.bak displays in the To: field. 3. Edit the filename in the To: field and change the extension from .bak to anything else (for example, .dgn). A copy of the selected file is made, the Copy File dialog box closes, and the copy of the selected file is selected for opening in MicroStation Managers Files list box.
614
Fundamentals
To rename a file with MicroStation Manager

1. In MicroStation Managers Files list box, select the file. 2. In MicroStation Managers File menu, choose Rename. The Rename File dialog box opens. The filename of the selected file displays in the From: field, and the To: field is empty. 3. Enter a filename in the To: field. MicroStation Manager does not automatically append .dgn to the filename. If the filter is set to *.dgn and the new filename does not end in .dgn, the new filename will not automatically appear in MicroStation Managers Files list box. 4. Click OK. The file is renamed, the Rename File dialog box closes, and the newly named file is selected for opening in MicroStation Managers Files list box.
Renaming a file with MicroStation Manager.
To delete a file with MicroStation Manager

1. In MicroStation Managers Files list box, select the file. 2. From MicroStation Managers File menu, choose Delete. An alert box opens, displays the selected files path and name, and requires you to confirm its deletion. 3. Click OK to delete the file.
615
Fundamentals
To compress a file with MicroStation Manager

1. In MicroStation Managers Files list box, select the file. 2. From MicroStation Managers File menu, choose Compress > Design. The selected file is compressed.
To create a new subdirectory with MicroStation Manager

1. From MicroStation Managers Directory menu, choose New. The Make Directory dialog box opens. 2. In the Dir: field, enter a valid subdirectory name. 3. Click OK. The new subdirectory is created and displayed in the Directories list box.
Creating a new subdirectory with MicroStation Manager
To copy the DGN files in a directory to a new directory with MicroStation Manager
1. (Optional) Set List Files of Type to *.* or another appropriate filter if all the files you are copying do not end in .dgn. 2. In MicroStation Managers Directory menu, choose Copy. The Copy Directory dialog box opens. In the Dir: field, the current
616
Fundamentals
Merging DGN files
working path and directory are displayed and highlighted. 3. Edit the path and directory in the Dir: field. 4. Click OK. The files whose extensions satisfy the filter are copied to the designated directory. If the directory does not exist, MicroStation Manager reports errors copying the files.
To compress all the design files in a directory

1. Use MicroStation Managers Directories list box to select the desired directory, or choose one of the directories in its Directory menu. 2. Set List Files of Type to an appropriate filter. 3. From MicroStation Managers Directory menu, choose Compress > Design. 4. In the alert box that opens, click OK. Every design file that matches the filter is compressed.
Merging DGN files

Merging DGN files is essentially (but not entirely) the process of copying all models (see page 6-50) from one or more DGN files (the source file[s]) to another (the destination file). In addition to copying models, the following processing is part of a merge operation: Tag set definition elements are copied from the source file(s) to the destination. Graphic group numbers, text nodenumbers, element ID numbers, and line style numbers in the source file(s) are mapped to available numbers in the destination file. (Duplicate cell definitions and tag set definitions from the source file[s] are not transferred.)
It is also possible to run the Merge utility from the DOS command prompt. This enables you to batch merge operations.
617
Fundamentals
Merging DGN files
To merge DGN files with MicroStation Manager

1. From MicroStation Managers File menu, choose Merge. The Merge dialog box opens.
2. In the Files to Merge section, click the Select button. The Select Files to Merge dialog box opens. 3. In the list box, select the first (or only) source file. 4. (Optional) Use Ctrl-click to select additional source files. 5. Click the Add button. The file(s) is listed in the File List. 6. Click the Done button. The Select Files dialog box closes and focus returns to the Merge dialog box, where the selected files are displayed in the Files to Merge list box. 7. In the Merge Into section, click the Select button. The Select Destination File dialog box opens. 8. In the list box, select the destination file. 9. Click OK. The Select Destination File dialog box closes, and focus returns
618
Fundamentals
Exiting MicroStation
to the Merge dialog box. 10. Click the Merge button. When merge processing completes, the Merge dialog box closes and focus returns to MicroStation Manager.
To run Merge from the system command line

1. At a system prompt, enter: msbatch merge <destination_filename> <source_filename_1> [ <source_filename_n>] Example: msbatch merge destination.dgn source1.dgn source2.dgn source3.dgn
Exiting MicroStation
As you work, MicroStation saves all changes you make to the open DGN file to disk (assuming you have not turned off the default Automatically Save Design Changes toggle under Workspace > Preferences > Operation). After you close the DGN file, you can no longer undo changes with MicroStations Undo feature. Therefore, be sure to undo any unwanted changes to the DGN file before you exit MicroStation.
To exit MicroStation
1. From the File menu, choose Exit. or From the application window menu (if one exists), choose Close. or In the MicroStation Manager dialog box, click Cancel.
MicroStation and Graphical Input

You can use a mouse, digitizing tablet, or similar pointing device with MicroStation to enter graphical input.
619
Fundamentals
Graphical input with a mouse
Buttons on the mouse or digitizing tablet are assigned to send different types of graphical input to MicroStation. These button assignments are called the MicroStation buttons. For example, the button assigned as MicroStations Data button sends a type of input called a data point (see page 6-37) to MicroStation when pressed.

If your mouse has three buttons, there is one for each of the most common types of graphic input to MicroStation.
If your mouse has two buttons, you simulate the third button by simultaneously clicking both buttons.
The default mouse button assignments are as follows:

MicroStation button Data Tentative Reset 3D Data 3D Tentative Invoked by Left button Left button-Right button chord Right button Alt-Left button Alt-Left button-Right button chord
The defaults are appropriate for a two-button mouse. If you are using a three-button mouse, you should change Tentative to use a single button (rather than the two-button chord) for faster operation. Some three-button mouse devices require additional configuration in Windows to be recognized appropriately. For specific details go to MicroStation On the Web (Help > MicroStation on the Web).
Using a scrolling mouse

You can use a mouse that has a wheel for scrolling to manipulate MicroStation view window and dialog box scroll bars. You can also use it to zoom in and out of designs and enter tentative points (snap).
620
Fundamentals
You must have the required drivers already installed on your system. For optimal use of a mouse with scrolling capabilities in MicroStation, perform the following steps (you only need to do this once).
To configure a scrolling mouse in MicroStation

1. From the Windows Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Mouse icon. 3. In the Mouse Properties dialog box that opens, select the StepSavers tab. 4. Make sure that the option labeled Select a window just by pointing at the title bar is turned off. When you open MicroStation, you can either choose to accept the default settings for the mouse wheel, or you can change them.
To configure the wheel settings

1. From MicroStations Workspace menu, choose Preferences. The Preferences dialog box opens. 2. In the Category list box, select Mouse. 3. Change any settings necessary. 4. Click OK to accept the changes, or Cancel to close the dialog box without saving the changes.
To enable the wheel to also be a button

1. From the Windows Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Mouse icon. 3. In the Mouse Properties dialog box that opens, select the Wheel tab. 4. In the Wheel Button group box, turn on the Turn on the
621
Fundamentals
Graphical input with a digitizing tablet
wheel button. check box. 5. In the Button Assignment drop-down menu, select Default. After enabling the wheel to also be the middle mouse button, you can then assign it a type of graphical input, such as Data. For more information, see Reassigning buttons (page 6-22).
Graphical input with a digitizing tablet

Most digitizing tablet cursors (pucks) have at least four buttons. The button layout for typical tablet cursors is shown in the figure. The Command button is used to select commands on a digitizing tablet menu. The default digitizing tablet button assignments in MicroStation are as follows:
MicroStation button Data Tentative Reset Command Cursor 1 /3 D Data Cursor 2 /3 D Tentative Cursor 3-12 Button on tablet cursor 1 3 4 2 5 6 7-16
For information on setting up and using a digitizing tablet, see Bentley Digitizer Tablet Interface for Windows.
Reassigning buttons
Using the Button Assignments dialog box (Workspace > Button Assignments), you can assign button combinations that are:
A single button. A single button modified by the Alt key.
622
Fundamentals
Using Drawing Tools
Two buttons pressed simultaneously (mouse only). Two buttons pressed simultaneously, modified by the Alt key (mouse only).
To confirm the button assignments on your system or to reassign buttons, use the Button Assignments dialog box (Workspace > Button Assignments).
To reassign buttons in MicroStation

1. From the Workspace menu, choose Button Assignments. The Button Assignments dialog box opens. 2. In the list box, select the button whose assignment you want to change. 3. Put the pointer in the area below the list box where the instructions appear. 4. Click the button or combination of buttons that you want to assign to the selected button. The new button assignment is shown in the list box.
Using Drawing Tools

MicroStation has dozens of drawing tools (called tools, for short). They are organized for convenient selection in tool boxes. A tool box that is open on the screen in its own window is said to be floating. You can change the arrangement of tools in a floating tool box by resizing its window.
Linear Elements tool box (floating)
Tools are represented in tool boxes by icons. For simplicity, the term tool is used to refer both to a tool and its icon.
The Main tool frame opens automatically the first time you start MicroStation along with the Attributes tool box, the Primary Tools tool box and the Standard tool box. The Main tool frame is docked by default to the left
623
Fundamentals
Borderless tool icons
edge of the MicroStation window, and the Attributes, Primary Tools and Standard tool boxes are docked by default to the top edge.
Main tool frame
Primary Tools tool box
Standard tool box
Attributes tool box
Docked Attributes, Primary Tools and Standard tool boxes

In the Tools menu, check marks indicate open tool boxes.
Borderless tool icons

Borderless icons is the default setting for MicroStation. Unless a tool is beneath the pointer or is selected, its icon appears without a border. To restore icon borders, turn off Borderless Icons in the Look and Feel category
624
Fundamentals
Showing and hiding tools
of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences).
Linear Elements tool box (borderless icons)
Showing and hiding tools

You can selectively disable and enable the display of individual tools in tool boxes.
To hide or show a tool

1. Open the tool box that contains the tool icon. 2. Position the pointer within the tool box and right-click. A pop-up menu opens. Enabled tools are indicated with check marks. 3. Choose the pop-up menu item for the tool you want to hide or show. To remove a tool from a tool box, see Tool Boxes in the Administrator Guide.
Colored tools
Tools are colorized using a 16-color palette.
625
Fundamentals
Working with tool boxes
Tool color preferences
You can customize the color palette using the Tool Colors dialog box. This is opened by clicking the Tool Colors button in the Look and Feel category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences). To begin customization, choose the desired colors using the option menus in the Custom Tool Colors section of the Tool Colors dialog box. Individual icon colors can be customized using the controls in the Insert (Modify) Tool dialog box, which is accessible from the Tool Boxes tab of the Customize dialog box (Workspace > Customize). The preference, Colorize Only Highlighted Tools, in the Look and Feel category of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences), affects the appearance of tool colors. While this preference is on, all tools are shown in gray-scale except for the selected tool, and if applicable, the tool beneath the pointer. The preference is off by default.

You can select a tool in a tool box without floating it. This makes it easier for you to select tools in tool boxes without cluttering the screen.
The Main tool frame is an example of the parent of children tool boxes. The tool boxes can be opened and a tool selected through the parent tool box. One tool from each child tool box displays in the Main tool frame. For example, a tool in the Linear Elements tool box always appears as the second tool in the right-hand column in the Main tool frame either the Place SmartLine tool or the most recently selected tool.
626
Fundamentals
Several tool boxes cannot be accessed from the New User user interface. You can open more than one tool box at the same time using the Tool Boxes dialog box by turning on their check boxes.
To open (and float) a tool box

1. In the Tools menu or one of its submenus, turn on the menu item that corresponds to the tool box you want to open. For example, to open the Linear Elements tool box, turn on Linear Elements in the Tools menus Main submenu.
Alternative method To open (and float) a tool box

1. From the Tools menu, choose Tool Boxes. The Tool Boxes dialog box opens. Its list box contains an entry for each available tool box. The check box next to each entry indicates whether or not the tool box is open.
2. In the list box, click (turn on) the check box for the tool box you want to open and click OK. or In the list box, double-click the list box entry for the tool
627
Fundamentals
box you want to open.
To open a child tool box of the Main tool frame

1. In the Main tool frame, press on the tool that is the representative from the child (and hold the Data button down). To find the location of the Data button on your systems graphic input device, see Graphical input with a mouse (see page 6-20) and Graphical input with a digitizing tablet (see page 6-22). For example, to open the Linear Elements tool box, press on the second tool in the right-hand column in the Main tool frame (Place SmartLine in the default tool box configuration). As long as you hold down the Data button, the Linear Elements tool box remains open. You can drag across the tool box to select a tool. When you release the Data button, the tool box closes and the selected tool displays in the Main tool frame.
Linear Elements tool box opens from the Main tool frame
To open and float a child tool box of the Main tool frame
1. In the Main tool frame, press on the tool from the desired child, and drag the child off the Main tool frame. You have to drag the pointer a certain distance from the Main tool frame before it is torn off. When the pointer is far enough away, the tool boxs outline displays dynamically. or Use the Tools menu (see To open (and float) a tool box on page 6-27). or
628
Fundamentals
Use the Tool Boxes dialog box (see To open (and float) a tool box on page 6-27).
Tearing off and floating the Linear Elements tool box.
For example, to open and float the Linear Elements tool box using the first method, press on the second tool in the right-hand column of the Main tool frame and drag the Linear Elements tool box off of the Main tool frame. Some tool boxes contain view controls, which are used to change the part of the design displayed in view windows. For more information, see Using View Controls (see page 7-8).
Docking tool boxes

Tool boxes can be docked along the edges of the MicroStation window. When a tool box is docked, its title bar is not displayed and its border becomes narrower.
By default the Main tool frame is docked along the MicroStation windows left edge, and the Attributes, Primary Tools and Standard tool boxes are docked along the top edge. You can undock them if you wish.
Docked tool box movement

A single dragging operation can be used to undock and re-dock a tool box. If a tool
629
Fundamentals
box is docked at the time it is closed, it is automatically docked when it is reopened.
The following windows are also dockable (on the top or bottom edge of the MicroStation window only):
Key-in window (see Key-ins on page 6-40) View Groups window (see To open a view window on page 7-1) AccuDraw window (see AccuDraw in the User Guide) Snaps button bar (see Snapping to points on elements in the User Guide)
To move a tool box or other dockable window to a docking area without docking it, hold down the Ctrl key while dragging the title bar.
To dock a floating tool box

1. Hold down the Data button and drag the tool box by its title bar toward the edge of the MicroStation window to which you want to dock it. As the pointer approaches the edge, the dynamically displayed outline of the tool box changes to indicate the size of the tool box if it were to be docked. 2. When the dynamically displayed outline is in the desired docking position, release the Data button.
To undock a docked tool box

1. Starting with the pointer on the tool boxs narrow border or on a blank area, drag the tool box away from the edge of the MicroStation window. 2. When the dynamically displayed outline of the tool box is in the desired location, release the Data button.
630
Fundamentals
Locating and selecting tools

Only one tool is selected at a given time. The name of the selected tool is shown in the status bar, and the tool is highlighted in the tool box. The default selected tool is the Element Selection tool.
To locate a tool
1. Point at a tool in a tool box for a moment. A yellow rectangle with text displays below the pointer. This tool tip identifies the tool by name. (The name may be abridged.) Also, the status bar shows a description of the tool. 2. Move the pointer across the tool box while continuing to refer to the tool tips and/or the status bar descriptions. Tools can be selected for locked or single-shot operation:
A locked tool remains selected even after you have used it. You can continue to use the tool, without having to select it again, until you select another tool.
When a tool is selected for single-shot operation, it can be used once. Upon completion of the single operation, the default tool, if one exists, is automatically selected.
If the desired tool is in a child tool box of the Main tool frame, you can select the tool by pressing on the visible tool from that tool box, dragging the pointer to the desired tool, and releasing the Data button. (As you drag, neither tool tips nor status bar descriptions display. However, the status bar does show tool names.) You can control the selection of tools with the user preference setting, Single Click, in the Look and Feel category of the Preferences dialog
631
Fundamentals
box (Workspace > Preferences). With Single Click set to: Single-shot you can select a tool for single-shot operation with a single click, or you can double-click it to select and lock the tool. Locked you can select and lock a tool with a single click, or you can double-click it to set it for single-shot operation.
For more information about setting user preferences, see User Preferences on page 8-1.
To select a tool from a tool box (Single Click set to Locked)

1. Click the tool. The tool remains active until another tool is chosen.
To select a tool from a tool box (Single Click set to Single-shot)

1. Click the tool. After using the tool (once), the active tool reverts to the default tool.
To select a tool from a tool box for single use (Single Click set to Locked)
1. Double-click the tool. After using the tool (once), the active tool reverts to the default tool.
632
Fundamentals
Working with the selected tool
To select and lock a tool from a tool box (Single Click set to Single-shot)
1. Double-click the tool. The tool remains active until another tool is chosen. You can control whether or not tool tips appear.
To toggle the display of tool tips

1. From the Help menu, choose Tool Tips.
Alternative method To toggle the display of tool tips

1. From the Tools menu, choose Tool Boxes. The Tool Boxes dialog box opens. 2. Click the Show Tool Tips check box. 3. Click OK.

MicroStation has several aids to help you use tools. Settings that affect how a tool works can be controlled in the tool settings window. The Status Bar along the bottom border of the MicroStation window displays prompts and messages about the selected tool. For more information about working with the selected tool, see Status Bar in the online Reference Guide.
Tool settings
Tool settings affect the operation of a specific tool. For example, the Method
633
Fundamentals
setting sets how a rectangle is drawn with the Place Block tool. In a tool box that is attached to its parent (not floating), tools with associated settings display a triangle.
Rather than forcing you to adjust a tools settings each time you select that tool, tool settings remain in effect until you change them. This makes MicroStation more efficient to use, but also means you must keep the active tools settings in mind or displayed on the screen.
Tool Settings window

The tool settings window is used to adjust tool settings. For example, if the Place Block tool is selected, controls for adjusting the tool settings Method, Area, Fill Type, and Fill Color are displayed in the window, and the windows title bar reads Place Block. If closed, the window opens automatically when a tool with settings is selected.
The tool settings window displays settings specific to the selected tool. Not all settings are specific to particular tools. For example, element attributes and locks affect the placement of elements with many tools. When the tool settings window is closed, you cannot see the tool settings for the selected tool. The settings still affect the behavior of the tool.
Checking the status bar

It is recommended that you make it a habit to frequently check the status bar at the bottom of the application window (or the screen).
It displays a variety of useful information, including prompts, messages, and the name of the selected tool. If you are not sure where you are with a tool, look in the status bar.
634
Fundamentals
The status bar is divided into two sections:
Left-hand section of status bar

The far left section ordinarily shows the name of the selected tool (or view control) followed by a greater-than symbol (>) and message text. Message text that follows the > is the selected tools prompt; a tools prompts guide you step by step as you perform an operation with a tool.
As you move the pointer on tools in a tool box, the name of the selected tool and the associated message text are replaced with a description of the tool over which the pointer is located. This is intended as a form of online assistance.
If an error has occurred, relative to the current tool, the name of the selected tool and the associated message text are replaced with the error message. For example, if you are using the Copy Element tool and you enter a data point in a blank part of the view instead of identifying an element, the message No Elements Found will appear.
Immediately to the right of the tool section of the status bar is the Message Center window icon and message area, which displays various error, warning, and information messages. Clicking the Message Center icon opens the Message Center window, which lets you review the messages that were previously displayed in the status bar.
Message Center window
When you enter a tentative point or request quantitative information for
635
Fundamentals
example, distances or angles using tools in the Measure tool box the fields in the section to the right of the Message Center window icon display the values and may be reviewed in the Message Center window. For more information about tentative points, see Using Tentative Points in the User Guide.
Right-hand section of status bar

The right-hand section ordinarily consists of a series of fields. From left to right, the status information indicated in these fields is as follows:
Snap Mode setting. The Locks icon does not indicate status information. Active Level setting. The count of selected elements (see Selecting Elements in the User Guide). If this field is blank, no elements are selected. Whether the fence is placed. If this field is blank, the fence is not placed. For more information about using a fence to manipulate and modify elements, see Using the Fence to Manipulate and Modify Elements in the User Guide. Whether the configuration variable MS_WORKMODE is set to DGN or DWG. When set to DGN, the field is blank. When set to DWG, the field has a white crosshair on a blue background. Whether changes to the open DGN file are unsaved. If the field is blank, there are no unsaved changes. If the field has a black floppy-disk icon then there are unsaved changes in the DGN. If the field has a red floppy-disk icon with an X through it, the open DGN file is open for read-only access.
For information about how to set MS_WORKMODE and other configuration
636
Fundamentals
variables, see Working With Configuration Variables in the Administrator Guide.
Data points
A data point is graphic input that, depending on the context: Designates a point in a design (for element placement or selection, for example). Designates the view in which it is entered (for fitting or updating, for example). Accepts an operation (deleting an element, for example), rather than rejecting it.
In MicroStation, all open view windows are active. That is, you do not need first to select a view to work in; you can place and manipulate elements in any open view. This aspect of MicroStation is so powerful that you can even begin placing an element in one view and finish placing it in another view. For more information about working with views, see Viewing Designs on page 7-1. MicroStation offers a variety of more precise techniques for entering a data point. For information about these techniques, see Using Tentative Points and AccuDraw in the User Guide.
To enter a data point

1. Position the pointer on the desired location in a view. 2. Press the Data button.
Resetting
Resetting in MicroStation is similar to pressing the Esc key in some other programs. For example, Resetting will back you out of most procedures in MicroStation that have several steps. If a view control is selected, a Reset (or two) will de-select the view control and reselect the drawing tool selected when the view control was selected.
637
Fundamentals
Coping with mistakes
To Reset
1. Press the Reset button.

MicroStation supports unlimited undo, which lets you undo drawing operations to recover from a mistake. Similarly, you can use the View Previous and View Next view controls to scroll through viewing operations on a per view basis.
To undo the last operation

1. From the Edit menu, choose Undo <operation>. or Press Ctrl-Z. For example, suppose that you just deleted an element with the Delete Element tool. To undo this operation, you would choose Undo delete element from the Edit menu.
After you undo an operation, the operation just before it becomes undoable. You can, therefore, undo a series of operations by repeatedly choosing Undo from the Edit menu. There is no limit to the number of undos you can perform within a design session. The undo buffer is only limited by your disk storage space. A limitation on undoing is that unless you are recording the open DGN files Design History (see page 6-10), you cannot undo operations made before the file was last closed or compressed. You see when you close or compress the file (including saving as), the undo buffer is emptied. A DGN file is compressed by choosing Compress > Design from the File menu.
638
Fundamentals
To undo all operations recorded in the undo buffer

1. From the Edit menus Undo Other submenu, choose All.
Alternative method To undo all operations recorded in the undo buffer

1. If the Preference Automatically Save Design Changes is off, close the open DGN file without saving changes. This preference is set in the Operation section of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace > Preferences).
To undo the last undo operation

1. From the Edit menu, choose Redo <operation>. or Press Ctrl-R.
639
Fundamentals
Key-ins
Key-ins
Key-ins are typed instructions entered into the Key-in window to control MicroStation. The effect of nearly all key-ins can be obtained using the graphical user interface. However, a key-in can be quicker at times, especially since MicroStation recognizes abbreviations.
MicroStation lets you assign key-ins to the function keys F1-F12 as well as combinations of those keys and the Shift, Alt, and Ctrl keys. MicroStation stores these assignments in function key menus.
To open the Key-in window

1. From the Utilities menu, choose Key-in. or From the Help menu, choose Key-in Browser.
640
Fundamentals
Entering a key-in
Entering a key-in
Before you enter key-ins, the Key-in window must have the input focus. When the Key-in window has the input focus, the blinking text cursor appears in the key-in area and the title bar (if visible) is highlighted.
MicroStation recognizes abbreviated key-ins. For example, the key-in MDL LOAD <APPLICATION_NAME> can be abbreviated MDL L <APPLICATION_NAME>. The abbreviation cannot be ambiguous; that is, it must be unique.
To automatically complete the keyword selected in a list box, press space bar.
To scroll through previously entered key-ins, enter the prefix (for example, MDL) and use the cursor keys to scroll through the list.
To conserve screen space, resize the Key-in window so only the top of the dialog box is visible, or simply dock it by dragging it to the top or bottom border of the MicroStation window. Docking the Key-in window automatically resizes it so only the top of the dialog box is visible. When the Key-in window is docked, you can click the Browse Key-in icon to see more of the dialog box.To undock the Key-in window and simultaneously expand it to its full size, choose Key-in Browser from the Help menu.
Many key-ins conclude with a parameter, which is either optional, as in the BACKUP key-in (see page 6-8), or required. In some cases it is convenient to define a parameter in a key-in with a configuration variable.
641
Fundamentals
Finding and building a key-in
To select a tool or view control using a key-in

1. In the Key-in windows key-in field, type the key-in text. As you type, the characters are matched to keywords in the key-in command language. When there is a match, the matched keyword is automatically selected in a list box below the key-in field. 2. If necessary, edit the key-in. For more information about editing key-ins, see Editing key-ins on page 6-43. 3. When done, click the Key-in button or press Enter. The key-in is entered. If the effect is not evident, check the status bar for a message.
Finding and building a key-in

The list boxes in the Key-in window can also be used to find and build key-ins: You scroll through the first words of key-ins, select one, scroll through words that can follow the selected word, select one, and so on. Then you can submit the key-in to MicroStation. For information about the key-ins that correspond to particular tools and view controls, see the tool box reference sections in this guide. Other places to find key-ins are in the help system and, specifically, in the online Reference Guide.
To build a key-in
1. In the left-most list box of the Key-in window, select a keyword. The selected keyword is displayed in the key-in field, and subordinate second-level keywords are shown in the Key-in windows next list box. 2. As necessary, select additional keywords, one per list box from left to right, until the desired key-in is constructed. 3. To enter (submit) the constructed key-in, click the Key-in button or press Enter.
642
Fundamentals
Recalling key-ins
Recalling key-ins
MicroStation stores submitted key-ins in a buffer so you can recall them and, if necessary, edit them. This feature is similar to some operating systems command line editors. When the buffer is full, the earlier key-ins are deleted as necessary to make room for the latest ones.
To recall and enter (submit) a key-in at the same time, double-click it in the history list box.
To recall a key-in
1. Press the key repeatedly until the desired key-in text appears in the key-in field of the Key-in window. or In the large key-in history list box at the bottom of the Key-in window, select the desired key-in.
Editing key-ins
The basic editing keys available for text editing in MicroStation can be used to edit text in the Key-in window, whether the text was recalled from an earlier key-in or entered directly. For more information about editing text, see Basic text editing functions in the Guide to Generating Drawings.
To move the insertion point in the key-in field

1. Click with the pointer where you want the insertion point.
To delete text in the key-in field

1. Press the Del or Backspace key.
643
Fundamentals
Preparing to Draw
To delete a range of text in the key-in field

1. Select the text by dragging across it with the pointer. 2. Press the Del key.
To delete all the text in the key-in field

1. Reset or press Esc.
To replace a range of text in the key-in field

1. Select the text by dragging across it with the pointer. (If the text is a whole word, you can double-click it to select it.) 2. Key in the new text.
Preparing to Draw
Except for user preferences, there are no default settings in MicroStation. The settings described in the following subsections can be saved in the DGN file on disk. To preserve changes to these DGN file settings between sessions, you must explicitly save the settings. See Saving DGN file settings on page 6-50.
Seed files
When you create a DGN file, you identify a seed file as a template for the DGN file. The new DGN file is actually a copy of the seed file.
Seed files do not (necessarily) contain elements, but, like other DGN files, they do contain at least one (default) model, settings, and view configurations. Having a seed file with customized settings frees you from having to adjust settings each time you create a new DGN file. If you wish, you can have a different seed file for each type of drawing you do.
644
Fundamentals
Seed files
A number of discipline-specific seed files are provided with MicroStation, in addition to the generic seed files, seed2d.dgn and seed3d.dgn. For information about creating a custom seed file, see Seed DGN Files in the Administrator Guide.
To select a seed file

1. From the File menu, choose New. The New dialog box opens. 2. In the Seed File section, click the Browse button. The Select Seed File dialog box opens. The default filter is MicroStation DGN Files [*.dgn].
3. (Optional) To list all files, or AutoCAD files in the Files list box, choose All Files [*.*] or AutoCAD Drawing Files [*.dwg] from the List Files of Type option menu. 4. (Optional) To select a different source disk drive, choose the
645
Fundamentals
DGN design environment
desired drive from the Drives option menu. 5. (Optional) To select a different source directory, use the Directories list box. 6. In the Files list box, select the desired seed file. or In the Files field, key in the name of the desired seed file. 7. Click OK.
DGN design environment

In 2D drafting, the MicroStation equivalent of a sheet of drafting paper is the design plane. Unlike a sheet of drafting paper, however, the design plane (or cube in 3D) in a DGN file is extremely large, letting you draw your models at full scale. To draw various elements in your model, you enter data points. Each data point placed in the design plane has associated X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) positions or coordinates. The design plane, then, is simply a Cartesian coordinate system upon which your model lies.
Coordinates are expressed in the form (X,Y). In the Seed files (see page 6-44) provided with MicroStations Default workspace, the point called the Global Origin is set to the design planes exact center and assigned the coordinates 0,0.
For most purposes the Global Origin in the provided seed files is fine. You may, however, wish to change the location or coordinates of the Global Origin. For example, an architect may want all coordinates to be positive values. A mapper or surveyor may need to use a grid system defined by a government agency to reference all locations to a specific point. For more information, see Setting the Global Origin on page 6-49.
When you enter a data point, MicroStation saves its coordinates in IEEE 64bit floating point format. The 3D Design cube is similar to the 2D design plane, but with a third axis Z (depth). Points in 2D models are stored as coordinate values expressed in the form (X,Y), while those for 3D models are stored as (X,Y,Z).
646
Fundamentals
Working units
Working units
Working units are the real-world units that you work with in drawing or creating your models in a DGN file. Typically the working units are defined in seed DGN files, from which you create your working DGN file. Normally, they will not require any adjustment.
You can choose master units and subunits by name, such as Feet and Inches, or Meters and Centimeters. Changing the working units Unit Names does not affect the size of geometry in your model. In summary:
Working units are set as Master Units (the largest units in common use in a design, such as meters) and fractional Sub Units (the smallest convenient unit to use, such as centimeters or millimeters). Sub Units cannot be larger than Master Units. You can change your working units without affecting the size of elements in the design. That is, you can draw in Meters and Centimeters, for example, and then change the Unit Names to Feet and Inches to get the English measurements.
To select the Unit Names for your Working Units

1. From the Settings menu, choose Design File. The DGN File Settings dialog box opens. 2. In the Category list, select Working Units. 3. From the Master Unit option menu, choose the units required. If you change the Master Units from Metric to English or vice versa, the Sub Unit is changed to a suitable unit also. Similarly, if you specify a Master Unit that is smaller than the current Sub Unit, the Sub Unit is changed to a suitable unit. 4. (Optional) From the Sub Unit option menu, choose the units required.
647
Fundamentals
Working units
Resolution setting
Located in the Advanced Unit Settings dialog box is the Resolution setting, which determines the accuracy of the design plane and does affect the size of existing elements in a model. You should consult with your site administrator before changing the resolution setting.
In a DGN file, the Resolution setting is used to set the worst case accuracy for the design environment, which occurs only at the very edge of the (very large) working area. For example, working to a worst case accuracy of 0.0001 meters, the size of the design plane/cube is 900 million kilometers along each axis. Actual accuracy is many millions of times better when drawing near the origin of the design plane, which is the usual situation. In almost all cases, therefore, there is no need to change the Resolution setting.
How working units are expressed

When you are inputting distances in DGN files, typically they are expressed in either of two forms: As a standard decimal number, such as 1.275. As two numbers separated by a colon, indicating MU:SU. For example, 3:4 means three master units (MU), and four subunits (SU).
The following table has examples of distances expressed in the latter form.
Working Units Feet / Inches Miles / Yards Meters/Centimeters Millimeters / Micrometers MU:SU 120:10 350:65 5:25 0:500, or :500 Distance 120 feet, 10 inches 350 miles, 65 yards 5 meters, 25 centimeters One half millimeter
648
Fundamentals
Coordinate readout
Setting the Global Origin

The key-in ACTIVE ORIGIN (GO=) is used to set the Global Origin. This lets you set the coordinate reading of 0,0 at any point in the model that you nominate (with a data point).
Coordinate readout
Coordinate readout is the setting that controls the format in which, and the accuracy with which, MicroStation displays coordinates, distances, and angles in the status bar and dialog boxes. Setting the coordinate readout does not affect the accuracy of calculations, only the accuracy with which the results are displayed.
To set coordinate readout

1. From the Settings menu, choose Design File. The DGN File Settings dialog box opens. 2. In the Category list box, select Coordinate Readout. Five option menus for setting coordinate readout display.
DGN File Settings dialog box (Coordinate Readout category)
649
Fundamentals
Saving DGN file settings
3. From the Format option menu in the Coordinate Readout section, choose either Master Units, Sub Units, or Working Units. 4. From the Accuracy option menu, choose the number of decimal places (1-6) or the denominator of the fractions (2-64) in which fractions of the units chosen from the Format option menu are displayed. 5. From the Format option menu in the Angles section, choose DD.DDDD for decimal angle readout or DD MM SS for angle readout in degrees, minutes, and seconds. 6. From the Mode option menu, choose Conventional, Azimuth, or Bearing. 7. From the Accuracy option menu, choose the number of decimal places (0-8) to which fractional angle measurements are displayed. 8. Click OK.
Saving DGN file settings

To preserve changes to DGN file settings such as working units and coordinate readout, between sessions, you must explicitly save the settings.
To save the current settings to the open DGN file on disk

1. From the File menu, choose Save Settings. or Press Ctrl-F.
Models
When you draw, or place elements, in a MicroStation DGN file, you are creating a model. A model can be either 2D or 3D, and is stored as a discrete object within the DGN file. Each DGN file, therefore, contains one or more models, either 2D or 3D. It may be helpful to think of a DGN file as a box that can contain both 3D and 2D objects models any of which you can view individually.
When you first create a new DGN file from one of the seed files, this provides the empty container setup with a default model ready for you
650
Fundamentals
Creating models
to create your design. If you use a 2D seed file, then the default setup is 2D, while a 3D seed file defaults to a 3D setup. In either case, you can create both 2D and 3D models in the open DGN file.
Every model has its own set of eight views. The model whose views are displayed or available for display at a given time is the active model.
You can create two types of models design and sheet.
Design model can be either 2D or 3D and consists of design geometry. Sheet model used to attach references (see page 6-54) for composing drawings.
Every model has its own unit system (see page 6-46). Conversely, levels are DGN file-specific and not model-specific. For more information about levels, see The Level System in the User Guide.
Using the Models dialog box (File > Models), you can create and switch quickly between models in a DGN file. For more information about the Models dialog box, see Models dialog box in the online Reference Guide.
If you define at least one view group (see page 7-5) for each model in a DGN file, you can use the View Groups window also to rapidly switch between models. The drop-down list box in the View Groups window identifies the model with which a view group is associated.
Creating models
Working with design models, you can create one or more discrete models, simply, within a single DGN file. Using the Models dialog box, you can quickly switch between the various models in the DGN.
Similarly, you can create sheet models to compose your design drawings (see Drawing Composition in the Guide to Generating Drawings). The drawings typically consist of references (see page 6-54) of the design models.
651
Fundamentals
Creating models
References can be from the open DGN file, or from other DGN files on disk. As with design models, you can use the Models dialog box to switch between the sheet models. At any given time, only one active model can be displayed, either a sheet model or a design model.
When you first create a DGN file, it has a default design model ready to place elements. When you open the Models dialog box, the default model has the name Default, with the Description as Master Model. You can use this model and, if necessary, change its name and description to more appropriate values.
To create a new Design or Sheet model

1. From the File menu, choose Models. The Models dialog box opens.
2. In the Models dialog box, click the Create a new model icon.
The Create Model dialog box opens.
652
Fundamentals
Creating models
3. From the Type option menu, choose Design, Sheet, Design From Seed or Sheet From Seed. 4. If the Type is Design, choose 2D or 3D from the right option menu. The Seed Model field displays the name of the seed model. 5. In the Name field, key in the required name. 6. (Optional) In the Description field, key in a brief description of the model. 7. In the Ref Logical field, key in a logical name for the model. The logical name is used to uniquely identify the model when it is attached as a reference. 8. (Optional) Turn on Create a View Group (to create a View Group for the model). Creating a View Group lets you change models via the View Groups window also. 9. If you will use the model as a cell, turn on Can be placed as a cell and select a cell type. 10. Click OK. To set the seed model for the most recently created model type (design or sheet),
653
Fundamentals
Referencing models
key-in MODEL SEED. You can set the seed model for design or sheet models. Key-in MODEL SEED DESIGN [File] [Model] to set the seed model for design and MODEL SEED SHEET [File] [Model] for sheet models.
To change the name and/or description of a model

1. In the Models dialog box, click the Edit Model Properties icon.
The Model Properties dialog box opens.
2. Edit the Name, Description, and Ref Logical fields, as required. 3. If required, turn on/off Can be placed as a cell. 4. Click OK.
Referencing models
In many cases, particularly on large projects, it may be that a design model
654
Fundamentals
Cells and models
consists of the active model, plus one or more references to other models. These references may be to other models contained in the open DGN file, or they may be models contained in other DGN files.
When other models are included as references to the active model, they still retain the link to the original model. This means that any changes to the original model will be reflected in the references. Using references gives you the option of having several designers work on a project simultaneously. For example, a civil designer could be working on the earthworks model, an architect on the building model, and a mechanical designer on the plant model. Each could have the other models referenced to their own model to keep abreast of any design changes in the other disciplines.
Cells and models

When you create models in a DGN file, you have the option of specifying that the model Can be placed as a cell. When this option is turned on, the model can be referenced as a model, or placed as a cell. When placed as a cell, the link to the original model is cut.
To select a model as a cell

1. From the Element menu, choose Cells. The Cell Library dialog box opens. 2. From the Cell Library dialog boxs File menu, choose Attach. The Attach Cell Library dialog box opens. 3. Select the DGN file containing the required model (to be placed as a cell) and click OK. The dialog box closes and the DGN file is loaded as a cell library. Models that can be placed as cells are displayed in the list box. 4. Select the required model and click Placement to make it the active cell. 5. Use the Place Active Cell tool to place the model as a cell.
655
Fundamentals
Importing and copying models

As well as creating references to models, you can import a model from another DGN file into the open DGN file. In this case, the link with the original model is cut and the imported model becomes another model in the open DGN file.
You can import models via the Import Models icon in the Models dialog box, or you can drag and drop the DGN/DWG file from Windows Explorer, or from the Models dialog box in another session of MicroStation.
Additionally, you can make a copy of an existing model in the open DGN file.
To import a model
1. In the Models dialog box, click the Import a model icon.
The Import Model From File dialog box opens.
2. Use controls in the dialog box to select the required DGN file. 3. Click OK. The Select Models dialog box opens.
656
Fundamentals
4. Select the model to import. 5. Click OK.
To import model(s) with drag and drop from Windows Explorer

1. Open the Models dialog box in the active model. 2. From Windows Explorer, drag and drop the DGN file containing the required model(s) into the Models dialog box. Where one or more models in the selected file have the same name as existing models in the open DGN file, then an alert box gives you the option of overwriting the models in the active DGN, or renaming them automatically as they are imported.
To import model(s) with drag and drop from a second session of MicroStation
1. Open the Models dialog box in both sessions of MicroStation. 2. Select one or more models that are to be imported. 3. Drag the selected models to the Models dialog box in the other session of MicroStation. Where one or more models being imported have the same name as existing models in the open DGN file, then an alert box gives you the option of overwriting the models in the active DGN, or renaming them automatically as they are imported.
To copy a model
1. In the Models dialog box, click the Copy a model icon.
657
Fundamentals
Deleting models
The Copy Model dialog box opens.
2. From the Model to Copy option menu, choose the required model. By default, the name of the model appears in the Name field, but with a numerical increment (such as Plan-1). 3. (Optional) Key in a new name and description. 4. Click OK.
Deleting models
You can delete any model in a DGN file, except the Default model that is present when the DGN file is first created.
To delete a model in the open DGN file

1. In the Models dialog box, select the model to be deleted.
2. Click the Delete a model icon.
You can Undo a model deletion.
Using Online Help
658
Fundamentals
Using Online Help
MicroStations Help menu and Help window are used to access MicroStations extensive online help.
Context-sensitive online help is available. The optional Tracking feature lets you see help on each tool as you select it. Hypertext links, which appear in color and are underlined, when you pass the pointer over them, let you move easily between related topics. Certain Windows DLLs must be present on you computer in order to use Online Help. Make sure you have Microsofts Internet Explorer (Version 5 or greater) installed. You do not need to change your default browser as long as Internet Explorer is installed. Please refer to Microsoft Internet Explorers home page for more information on Internet Explorer. The check mark next to the Tracking item on the Help menu indicates whether Tracking is on or off.
To open the Help window

1. From the Help menu, choose Contents. or Key in HELP.
659
Fundamentals
Using Online Help
The Help window opens, and the Table of Contents displays.
The Help window consists of two frames the navigation frame on the left and the content frame on the right. The navigation frame has the following tabs:
Contents used for browsing topics. Index index of help content. Search used for full-text searching of the help content. Favorites customizable list of your favorite topics.
660
Fundamentals
Using Online Help
To see help for each selected tool, or enable Tracking

1. In the Help menu, turn on Tracking. 2. Continue your work the Help window displays help for each tool you select.
To get help on a dialog box control, or turn on context-sensitive help

1. Move the input focus to a dialog box control (check box, option menu, list box, field, etc.) about which you would like to see help. The control that has the input focus is bordered by a rectangle, the active control indicator. 2. Press the F1 key (unless the HELP key-in has been assigned to a different function key). The Help window opens (if it is not already open) and shows information about the control with the input focus.
To browse topics using the Contents tab

1. On the Contents tab, click the folder symbol next to any book folder (such as User Guide, Reference Guide) to expand its contents. 2. Continue expanding folders until you reach the desired topic. 3. Select a topic to display its content in the content frame.
To display the next or previous topic according to the topic order shown in the Contents tab
1. To display the next topic, click the downward pointing arrow displayed near the top of the content frame. or To display the previous topic, click the upward pointing arrow
661
Fundamentals
Using Online Help
near the top of the content frame. To navigate in this manner, it is not necessary to first select the Contents tab.
To use the index of help content

1. Click the Index tab. 2. In the search field, type the word you are searching for. or Scroll through the index using the scroll bar to find a specific entry. 3. Select the desired entry and click the Display button. or Double-click the desired entry. The content that the selected index entry is referencing displays in the content frame. If you select an entry that has subtopics, a dialog box opens, from which you can select the desired subtopic. In this case, select the subtopic and click the Display button.
To search for text in the help content

1. Click the Search tab. 2. In the search field, type the word or phrase for which you are searching. 3. Click the List Topics button. Results of the search display in the list box below the search field. 4. Select the desired topic and click the Display button. or Double-click the desired topic. Search results vary based on the quality of the search criteria entered in the Search field. The more specific the search criteria, the more narrow the search results. You can improve your search results by improving the search criteria. For example, a word is considered to be a group of contiguous alphanumeric characters. A phrase is a group of words and their punctuation. A search string is a word or phrase on which you search.
662
Fundamentals
Using help in a networked environment
A search string finds any topic that contains all of the words in the string. You can improve the search by enclosing the search string in quotation marks. This type of search finds only topics that contain the exact string in the quotation marks.
To add a help topic to a list of favorite help topics

1. In the Contents, Index, or Search tab, select the desired help topic. 2. Click the Favorites tab. The selected help topic automatically displays in the Current topic field at the bottom of the tab. 3. Click the Add button.
To display a topic from your Favorites list

1. Click the Favorites tab. 2. In the list box, select the desired topic and click the Display button. or Double-click the desired topic. The selected topics content displays in the content frame. Online help is periodically updated and posted on Bentleys Documentation Web site, http://docs.bentley.com/ for downloading. On this site you can also browse the current help content for this product and other Bentley products.

If you are using MicroStation in a network environment, you can configure MicroStation to request online help from a file server on which the help file is installed. This will decrease your local systems operating overhead.
663
Fundamentals
To configure MicroStation to request online help from a file server

1. From the Workspace menu, choose Configuration. The Configuration dialog box opens. 2. In the list box, select MS_HELPLOAD_SERVER. 3. Click the Edit button. The Edit Configuration Variable dialog box opens. 4. Key in the path to the directory on the file server that contains the help file. Do not include the filename. 5. Click the OK button. 6. Back in the Configuration dialog box, choose File > Save to save the changes to your current user configuration file. 7. Click the OK button. 8. (Optional) To make the change effective immediately, exit and restart MicroStation. After you configure MicroStation to request online help from a file server, to view the online help content without running MicroStation, you will need to create or modify the existing MicroStation Documentation shortcut to refer to the file server directory specified by the configuration variable MS_HELPLOAD_SERVER.
664
Viewing Designs
Regardless of the size of your screen MicroStations view windows help you make the most of your system. You can configure view windows for maximum efficiency, taking into account your system, your project, and your working style.
In this chapter, you will find procedures concerning basic viewing operations, including:
Arranging View Windows (see page 7-1) Using View Controls (see page 7-8) Using the View Control Bar (see page 7-11) Setting View Attributesx(seexpagex7-27) Using Saved Views (see page 7-30)
Arranging View Windows

MicroStation gives you the option of having up to eight view windows open at any time. Also, it lets you customize the arrangement of view windows within the application window.
To open a view window

1. From the Window menus Views submenu, choose the number of the view window you want to open. Check marks in the submenu indicate the numbers of open view windows.
71
Viewing Designs
Alternative method To open a view window

1. From the Window menus Views submenu, choose Dialog. The View Groups window opens. By default, it docks automatically to the bottom of the window. Numbered buttons that are highlighted represent the open views.
View Groups window
2. To open a closed view window, click its numbered button.
To open or close multiple view windows in the View Groups window

1. In the View Groups window, click and drag across a series of view buttons. Whether the view opens or closes depends on the state of the first window. For example, if views 3 and 5 are closed and View 4 is already open, clicking button 3 and dragging in the dialog box from button 3 to button 5 opens views 3 and 5 (but does not close View 4).
72
Viewing Designs
To close a view window

1. From the Window menus Views submenu, choose the number of the view window you want to close. or In the windows title bar, click the close window button at the far right, or double-click the window menu button at the far left. or From the view windows control menu (open by clicking the window menu button at the far left of the view windows title bar), choose Close.
Alternative method To close a view window

1. From the Window menus Views submenu, choose Dialog. The View Groups window opens. By default it docks to the bottom of the window. Numbered buttons that are highlighted represent the open views. 2. To close an open view window, click its numbered button.
To arrange open view windows to minimize unused screen area

1. From the Window menu, choose Arrange.
To cascade open view windows

1. From the Window menu, choose Cascade. Each open view window is assigned an equal amount of screen space, but only the lowest numbered view window is entirely visible. The other open view windows are stacked beneath this view window with only their title bars visible. To bring a cascaded view window to the front of the stack, click its title bar. When the title bar is not visible, place the pointer over one of the windows borders, so that a resizing double-arrow appears, and click.
73
Viewing Designs
To tile open view windows

1. From the Window menu, choose Tile. Each open view window is assigned an equal amount of screen space, and the view windows are arranged by number from lowest to highest starting in the MicroStation windows upper left corner and progressing from left to right. If more than three view windows are open, the view windows are arranged in an upper and lower row. If view windows are open on more than one screen, each screens view windows are tiled on the screen in which they are open.
To make an open view window entirely visible without changing its size or location
1. From the Window menu, choose the window you want to see. (The bottom section of the Window menu lists the open windows.)
To maximize a view window

1. Click the view windows Maximize button. or From the view windows control menu, choose Maximize.
To minimize a view window

1. Click the view windows Minimize button. or From the view windows control menu, choose Minimize.
To restore a view window to its former size

1. Click the view windows Maximize or Minimize button. or From the view windows control menu, choose Restore.
74
Viewing Designs
View groups
To move a view window with the pointer

1. Position the pointer on the title bar of the view window. 2. Press and hold down the Data button. 3. Drag the view window to the desired location.
View groups
A view group is a set of view window layouts applicable to a model (see page 6-50) within the open DGN file. View groups thus make it easy to access and navigate through different models. View groups let you set up your MicroStation session to display your view window preferences including the number of open views, view size, and orientation. As well, a view group definition includes the attributes for each view and their level display settings.
Using view groups, you can quickly change from one configuration to another. For example, in some stages of the design process, you might prefer to arrange the screen with View 1 showing the Isometric view and covering two-thirds of the screen, while Views 2, 3 and 4 share the remaining part of the screen equally and show the Front, Bottom and Right views respectively. For other stages, you may like to have a single Isometric view, covering the whole work area.
When you create a model, you are prompted to create a view group associated with that model by turning on Create a View Group in the Create Model dialog box.
When you create a view group from the template for the view group, by default, the view group is the active view group. However, another view group can be designated by setting the configuration variables MS_VIEWGROUPSEEDNAME or MS_VIEWGROUPSEED. MS_VIEWGROUPSEEDNAME allows you to set the name of the view group in the current file to use as a template. MS_VIEW GROUPSEED allows you to set the name of the file where the template view group is located. The View Groups window is open and docked directly above the status bar by default. When you save settings (File > Save Settings), view groups
75
Viewing Designs
View groups
that have changes are saved.
To create a View Group when not creating a model

1. Set up the view windows in your preferred view windows configuration. 2. In the View Groups window, click the Manage View Groups icon. The Manage View Groups dialog box opens.
3. Click the Create View Group icon. The Create View Group dialog box opens. 4. Complete the Name and Description fields. The Model with which this View Group is associated already is noted on the dialog box. 5. Click OK. The new view group is created.
To change the active View Group

1. From the View Groups windows option menu, select a different view group. or In the Manage View Groups dialog box, select the View Group and click Apply (or simply double-click the required view group). Your screen updates to show the new display configuration.
76
Viewing Designs
Using the resize borders
To modify a View Group

1. In the View Groups window, click the Manage View Groups icon. The Manage View Groups dialog box opens. 2. Click the Edit the properties of the selected View Group icon. The View Group Properties dialog box opens. 3. Make the appropriate changes to Name and Description. 4. Click OK.
To delete a View Group

1. In the View Groups window, click the Manage View Groups icon. The Manage View Groups dialog box opens. 2. Select the required view group. 3. Click the Delete View Group icon. The highlighted view group is deleted.
Using the resize borders

The four borders of a view window are called resize borders because dragging them resizes the view window. For example, by dragging the right or left resize border, you can change the width of the view window. Similarly, by dragging the top or bottom resize border you can change the height of the view window. By dragging a corner of the resize border, you can change both the height and width of a view window. The pointer indicates the directions in which you can drag the border or corner. Some other MicroStation windows (for example, the Select Settings window) also can be resized in this manner. There are variations in the following procedures on some systems. If you have trouble with a procedure or suspect a difference between a procedure and a system convention, refer to your system documentation for window controls.
77
Viewing Designs
Using View Controls
To resize a view window with the pointer

1. Position the pointer on one of the view windows resize borders or corners.
To change Height Position pointer on Top or bottom resize border The pointer becomes
Vertical double arrow Width Right or left resize border
Horizontal double arrow Height and width simultaneously Any corner
Diagonal double arrow
2. Press and hold down the Data button. 3. Drag the border or corner to resize the view window as desired.
Using View Controls

View controls are used to manipulate a view, the portion of the design displayed in a view window. The most commonly used view controls can be selected in the View Control Bar (see page 7-11) on the bottom border of each view window.
Some of the most useful view controls include the following:
78
Viewing Designs
View controls and workflow
The Update View view control (see page 7-13) is provided to redraw the display when an operation leaves a view with an incomplete display. For example, if you delete an element that crosses in front of (and partially obscures) another element, the part of the underlying element that should be revealed might not be redrawn automatically.
Window Area (see page 7-16), which is used to define a smaller area to display in the selected view, or another.
Fit View (see page 7-18), which is used to fit the entire model in a view (for the big picture or to get your bearings).
Rotate View (see page 7-19), which is used to rotate a view.
View Previous (see page 7-23), which is used like an Undo function to negate previous viewing operations, as many as eight per view.
View controls and workflow

View controls operate much like drawing tools; many even have tool settings.
The interaction between view controls and tools results in an intuitive, comfortable workflow: 1. When you select a view control, it becomes active immediately. Any drawing operation in progress is suspended. 2 . When you finish using a view control, control returns to the selected drawing tool, thereby letting you continue the drawing operation
79
Viewing Designs
Locating and selecting view controls
from the point at which it was suspended.
To de-select a view control and continue a suspended drawing operation

1. Reset. (If you are in the middle of using a multiple-step view control such as Window Area, you will have to Reset a second time.)
Locating and selecting view controls

View controls are located as follows:
If Scroll Bars is on, in the Window menu, each lower left view window border contains a View Control Bar, which contains the most commonly used view controls.
In any case, view controls are located in the View Control tool box. The procedure for locating a view control in a tool box is the same as that for locating a tool in a tool box (see Locating and selecting tools on page 6-31).
The operation of the selected view control depends on the manner in which it is selected. If you select a view control from a particular views view control bar, you also are selecting that view as the one on which to operate. If you select a view control from a tool box, the active view is the one in which you enter the first data point when using the view control.
710
Viewing Designs
View Control Bar
See the view control procedures in View Control Bar on page 7-11.
To select a view control

1. In a view control bar or tool box, click the view control icon.
View Control Bar

View controls are arranged in the view control bar in the lower left corner of each view window as follows:
To Update (redraw) a view(s). In the view control bar for the view in question, select
Update View (see page 7-13)

Increase the magnification of a view.
Zoom In (see page 7-14)

Decrease the magnification of a view.
Zoom Out (see page 7-15)

Window an area in a view.
Window Area (see page 7-16)

Display all displayable elements in the active design and attached references in a view.
Fit View (see page 7-18)

Rotate the view.
Rotate View (see page 7-19)

View a different part of the design without changing the view magnification.
Pan View (see page 7-21)
711
Viewing Designs
View Control Bar
To Undo the last viewing operation. In the view control bar for the view in question, select
View Previous (see page 7-23)

Redo the last undone viewing operation.
View Next (see page 7-24)

(3D views only) Change the perspective angle of a 3D view.
Change View Perspective1

see Change View Perspective in the User Guide. 2 (3D views only) Set the view display mode.
Set View Display Mode see Set View Display Mode in the User Guide.
(3D views only) Navigate the camera in the active 3D view.
Navigate Camera3
see Navigate Camera in the User Guide. 4
1 2 3 4 Change View Perspective appears in the view control bar only if the active design file is 3D. Change View Perspective appears in the view control bar only if the active design file is 3D. Navigate Camera appears in the view control bar only if the active design file is 3D. Navigate Camera appears in the view control bar only if the active design file is 3D.
712
Viewing Designs
Update View
For information about using these view controls in 3D, see 3D viewing procedures that are similar to 2D in the User Guide.
Key-in:
VIEW ON 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8
Update View
Updates the contents of a view window(s).
Tool Setting
Effect
Update All Views
Updates the contents of all view windows.
To update a view
1. Select the Update View control. 2. If you select this view control from the View Control tool box (and there is more than one open view window), select a view(s) to update or click the Update All Views button to update all views. To stop an update in progress, Reset.
Key-in:
UPDATE VIEW EXTENDED view_window_number
For more information about view updating, see Adjusting the File
713
Viewing Designs
Zoom In
Update Sequence in the User Guide.
Zoom In
Increases a view windows magnification, making elements appear larger.
Tool Setting
Effect
Zoom Ratio
Sets the factor by which the view is magnified (and the size of the dynamic rectangle). The default is 2.0. The valid range is 1-50. If on, the camera eyepoint moves as the view is panned. If off, the camera eyepoint remains stationary when the panned views projection is anything other than Parallel. In these cases, the view changes to One Point projection as it pans.
Move Camera
To zoom in on a view
1. Select the Zoom In view control. When you move the pointer into the view, a dynamically displayed rectangle indicates what the new view boundary will be. 2. Enter a data point to define the center of the area of the view window to be displayed. 3. Enter another data point to zoom in again. (If you selected the Zoom In view control in the View Control tool box, you can zoom into a different view window.) or
714
Viewing Designs
Zoom Out
Reset or select a different tool.
Key-in:
ZOOM IN EXTENDED
To zoom in about the center of a view(s), key in ZOOM IN CENTER and select the view(s). You can also zoom in (or out) using the wheel of a scrolling mouse (see page 6-20).
Zoom Out
Decreases a views magnification, making elements appear smaller.
Tool Setting
Effect
Zoom Ratio Move Camera
Sets the factor by which the view magnification is decreased. The default is 2.0. The valid range is 1-50. If on, the camera eyepoint moves as the view is panned. If off, the camera eyepoint remains stationary when the panned views projection is anything other than Parallel. In these cases, the view changes to One Point projection as it pans.
715
Viewing Designs
Window Area
To zoom out in a view

1. Select the Zoom Out view control. If you selected Zoom Out in a windows view control bar, the view is zoomed out about its center by the Zoom Ratio. If you selected Zoom Out in the View Control tool box, select one or more views at the point to zoom about.
Key-in:
ZOOM OUT EXTENDED [zoom_ratio]
To zoom out about the center of a view(s), key in ZOOM OUT CENTER and select the view(s). You can also zoom out (or in) using the wheel of a scrolling mouse (see page 6-20).
Window Area
Lets you set the boundaries of a rectangular area in the design to be displayed within a view.
Tool Setting
Effect
Apply to Window Move Camera
If on, sets the destination view window. The chosen view window opens, if necessary. If on, the camera eyepoint moves as the view is panned. If off, the camera eyepoint remains stationary when the panned views projection is anything other than Parallel. In these cases, the view changes to One Point projection as it pans.
716
Viewing Designs
Window Area
To indicate a rectangular area to display in a view

1. In the destination views view control bar, select the Window Area view control. In the destination view, a full screen crosshair appears to help you accurately position the first corner of the area. 2. Enter a data point, in any view, to define the first corner. A rectangle displays dynamically, indicating the new view boundary. This rectangle always has the same aspect ratio as the destination view. 3. Enter a data point, in any view, to define the other corner of the area.
Alternative method To indicate a rectangular area to display in a view

1. In a View Control tool box, select the Window Area control. 2. Enter a data point to define one corner of the area to window. 3. Enter a data point to define the other corner of the area.
Key-in:
WINDOW AREA EXTENDED
717
Viewing Designs
Fit View
Fit View
Adjusts the view magnification so that the entire model is visible in the view.
Tool Setting
Effect
Files
Sets the scope of the fit operation: All Display all displayable elements in the active model file and any attached references. Active Display all displayable elements in the active model file. Reference Display all displayable elements in attached references, if any. Raster Display all displayable elements in attached raster references, if any.
Expand Clipping Planes Center Active Depth Center Camera
If on, the views Display Depth is adjusted, along with the view origin and magnification, so that all elements on levels that are on for the view are displayed. If on, centers the Active Depth in the fitted view. (It is recommended that you turn on Center Active Depth when fitting a view you intend to dynamically rotate, or a view whose perspective you intend to change.) If on, centers the Camera in the fitted view.
718
Viewing Designs
Rotate View
To fit the design in a view

1. Select the Fit View control. 2. If you selected Fit View in a View Control tool box, and there is more than one view, select the view(s) to be fitted. The view origin and magnification are adjusted so that all elements on levels that are on in the views are displayed. Elements on levels that are off are ignored.
Key-in:
FIT VIEW EXTENDED
For information about using Fit View in 3D, see Fitting views in 3D in the User Guide.
Rotate View
Rotates a view.
Tool Setting
Effect
Method
Sets how the view is rotated, as follows: 2 Points Interactively specifying the origin and rotation angle. Unrotated To the standard unrotated (Top) orientation.
719
Viewing Designs
Rotate View
Tool Setting Effect
Dynamic Display
If on, the elements rotate, letting you see the result of the panning dynamically. If off, graphics display to assist you in the rotating operation. If view projection is Parallel, then the graphics consist of an arrow, as in 2D. When any other camera view projection is active, a cube graphic assists the panning operation.
To rotate a view by two points

1. Select the Rotate View control. 2. Set Method to 2 Points. 3. Enter a data point to select the view to rotate and define the origin of the view x-axis. The origin, as well as a dynamic line indicating the positive direction of the view x-axis, displays in all views where it is possible. A rectangle that indicates the new view boundary also displays. 4. Enter a data point to define the positive direction of the view x-axis.
To rotate a view to align with the design plane axes

1. Select the Rotate View control. 2. Set Method to Unrotated. 3. Select the view(s).
Key-in:
ROTATE VIEW EXTENDED
For information about using Rotate View in 3D, see Rotating views in 3D in the User Guide.
720
Viewing Designs
Pan View
Pan View
Used to view a different part of the design without changing the view magnification.
Tool Setting
Effect
Dynamic Display
If on, the elements pan, letting you see the result of the panning dynamically. If off, graphics display to assist you in the panning operation. If view projection is Parallel, then the graphics consist of an arrow, as in 2D. When any other camera view projection is active, a cube graphic assists the panning operation.
Move Camera
If on, the camera eyepoint moves as the view is panned. If off, the camera eyepoint remains stationary when the panned views projection is anything other than Parallel. In these cases, the view changes to One Point projection as it pans.
To pan in a view
1. Select the Pan View control. 2. Enter a data point to select the view to pan and to define the origin for panning. A dynamic arrow displays between the origin and the pointer, indicating the distance and direction that the view will be moved. 3. Enter a data point to define the position in the view where you want the origin (defined in step 2) to be displayed.
721
Viewing Designs
Pan View
To scroll a view by a specified factor

1. Key in MOVE <DOWN | LEFT | RIGHT | UP> [factor]. Factor is the amount of the view to scroll. If factor is omitted the view is scrolled by the default factor 0.25 (one fourth of the view). 2. Select the view(s).
To dynamically pan in a view window with the mouse

1. Press the Shift key and hold it down. 2. Point in the view, press the Data button, and hold it down. The pointer location defines the anchor point for panning. 3. Drag away from the anchor point towards the part of the design that you want to move into the view. When panning begins, you can release the Shift key. To increase the speed of panning, drag the pointer further from the anchor point. To pan in a different direction, move the pointer past the anchor point in the new direction. 4. To stop panning, release the Data button.
Key-in:
PAN VIEW
You can dynamically pan in a view even when a drawing tool or view control is selected. For information about dynamically panning in a view with a digitizing tablet, see Panning while digitizing in the User Guide. You can also pan using the wheel of a scrolling mouse (see page 6-20). For information about using Pan View in 3D, see Panning in views in 3D in the User Guide.
722
Viewing Designs
View Previous
View Previous
Undoes the last viewing operation (view control operation or view attribute change).
To undo the previous viewing operation

1. Select the View Previous control. 2. If you selected View Previous in the View Control tool box, select the view whose operation is to be undone. After you undo a viewing operation, the operation previous to the negated operation then can be undone. 3. If desired, undo a series of previous operations as follows: Select the control in the view control bar for the desired window. or Select the views if the control was selected in the View Control tool box.
Key-in:
VIEW PREVIOUS
To undo a drawing operation, choose Undo (action) from the Edit menu.
723
Viewing Designs
View Next
View Next
Redoes the last undone viewing operation.
To redo the last undone viewing operation

1. Select the View Next control. 2. If you selected View Next in the View Control tool box, select the affected view.
Key-in:
VIEW NEXT
To redo a drawing operation, choose Redo (action) from the Edit menu.
Alternatives to the View Control Bars

It may be that you want to the reclaim the screen real estate used by the view control bars and scroll bars on view window borders. The View Control tool box (see page 7-25) and view control pop-up menu (see page 7-25) also provide access to view controls.
724
Viewing Designs
The View Control tool box alternative
To toggle the display of view control bars and scroll bars

1. From the Window menu, choose Scroll Bars. The view control bars and scroll bars either appear or disappear.
The View Control tool box alternative

The same view controls that are in the view control bars also are available in the View Control tool box.
This tool box also contains the view controls Copy View (see page 7-26) and Clip Volume (in 2D, this view control applies a clip boundary), plus several view controls that are enabled only while the open DGN file is 3D. For more information about the View Control tool box, see View Control tool box in the User Guide.
The View Control pop-up menu alternative

Using the view pop-up menu is an easy way to select view controls.
725
Viewing Designs
Copy View
To use the pop-up menu to select a view control

1. With the screen pointer in a view, press (and hold down) the Shift key. 2. Click the Reset button (right-click).
View Control pop-up menu
The pop-up menu is activated at the screen pointer location. 3. Choose the item that corresponds to the view control you want to select. The view control is selected.
Copy View
The Copy View view control in the 2D View Control tool box copies the contents of an entire view and its corresponding attributes to other views.
726
Viewing Designs
Align View
To copy a view and its attributes

1. Select the Copy View view control. 2. Select the source view. 3. Select the destination view(s) to which to copy the source view.
Key-in:
COPY VIEW
Align View
The ALIGN (view) key-in aligns the contents of an entire view so that it displays the same area as the selected source view.
To align two views

1. Key in ALIGN. 2. Select the source view. 3. Select the view(s) to align with the source view. The second view displays the same area as the source view. The orientation of the second view remains the same.
Key-in:
ALIGN
Setting View Attributes

Views have a number of attributes that you can adjust individually for each view window.
Some view attribute settings determine whether parts of a model elements on particular levels, text, fill, and drawing aids such as the grid are displayed. Others determine the manner in which the model is displayed
727
Viewing Designs
Selecting and controlling the display of a background image
with or without a background image or dynamic updating, for example. (Many of these view attributes are not accessible in the New User workspace user interface.)
Selecting and controlling the display of a background image

You can select an image in any of the supported image formats and control whether the image is displayed in the background of each view window.
To select a background image and control its display

1. From the Settings menu, choose Design File. The DGN File Settings dialog box opens. 2. In the Category list box, select Views.
The Background Image button and other controls are displayed in the main portion of the dialog box. 3. Click the Background Image button. The Display Image File dialog box opens. 4. Select the desired image file, and click OK. The Display Image File dialog box closes, and focus returns to the DGN File Settings dialog box. 5. For each view window in which you want to control the display of the selected image, choose the window by number from the View option
728
Viewing Designs
Other view attributes
menu and turn on the Background check box. 6. Click OK. The dialog box closes and the background images are applied to the chosen views.
Other view attributes

View attributes other than level display are set in the View Attributes dialog box. Some determine whether parts of a model and drawing aids will be displayed. Others determine how the DGN file is displayed.
To turn other view attributes on or off

1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes (or press Ctrl-B). or From any view windows control menu, choose View Attributes. The View Attributes dialog box opens.
2. From the View Number option menu, choose the number of the view whose attributes you want to change. 3. Turn the desired view attributes on or off by clicking the check
729
Viewing Designs
Using Saved Views
boxes to the left of the appropriate items. 4. Click the Apply button.
To apply the same attributes to all views

1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes (or press Ctrl-B). or From any view windows control menu, choose View Attributes. The View Attributes dialog box opens. 2. From the View Number option menu, choose the view whose attributes you want to apply to all views. 3. (Optional) Turn the desired view attributes on or off by clicking the check boxes to the left of the items. 4. Click the All button.
Using Saved Views

A saved view is a view definition, which includes the level display for both the active model and references, the clip volume, and Other view attributes (see page 7-29). The view definition is given a name and saved in the DGN file. You create the definition by setting up a source view as a template and saving it. The saved view can be recalled to a destination view window.
The Saved Views dialog box is used to name, save, recall, and delete saved views. The Saved Views dialog box is not accessible in the New User workspace user interface. For information about special ways to use saved views in 3D, see Using saved views in 3D in the User Guide.
To name and save a view

1. Set up the source view so that the desired portion of the design is
730
Viewing Designs
Using Saved Views
displayed and the view attributes are as desired. 2. From the Utilities menu, choose Saved Views. or From any view windows control menu, choose View Save/Recall. The Saved Views dialog box opens.
3. In the Saved View dialog box, click the Save View icon (at far left). The Save View dialog box opens. 4. In the Name field, key in a name for the view. The maximum number of characters in the name is limited to 511. Alphabetic and numeric characters and the $, ., and _ characters are valid. Lowercase characters are interpreted as uppercase. 5. (Optional) In the Description field, key in a description. 6. From the View option menu, choose the number of the source view. 7. Click OK.
To recall a saved view

1. From the Utilities menu, choose Saved Views. or
731
Viewing Designs
Using Saved Views
From any view windows control menu, choose View Save/Recall. The Saved Views dialog box opens. 2. From the View option menu, choose the number of the destination view. 3. In the list box, select the saved view you want to recall. 4. Click the Apply button.
To delete a saved view

1. From the Utilities menu, choose Saved Views. or From any view windows control menu, choose View Save/Recall. The Saved Views dialog box opens. 2. In the list box, select the saved view you want to delete. 3. Click the Delete button.
732
User Preferences
User preferences are settings that control the operation of MicroStation in ways that are not significant to other members of a workgroup. For example, they affect how MicroStation uses memory on a users system, how windows are displayed, how various items on the screen are laid out and behave, how references are attached by default, and so on. As the name implies, users can adjust these settings to suit their preferences.
Setting User Preferences

The Preferences dialog box is used to set user preferences.
To open the Preferences dialog box

1. From the Workspace menu, choose Preferences.
81
User Preferences
Categories
The active set of user preferences is one of three components of the active workspace MicroStations environment or configuration. Workspaces are typically used to customize MicroStation for a particular discipline, project, or task. As you switch between workspaces, you will probably prefer to keep the same set of user preferences in effect because they configure MicroStation for the way you work. To ensure that the same set of user preferences remain in effect, change your workspace by selecting (or customizing) project and user interface workspace components only. For more information about workspaces and workspace components, see Workspace Components in the Administrator Guide.
Categories
In the Preferences dialog box, user preferences are divided into categories such as Input, Look and Feel, Operation, Text, and so on to make finding the setting you want to adjust easier.
The following table summarizes MicroStations preferences and shows the as delivered default setting for each. This table contains many terms not previously defined. For more information about a particular preference, see Preferences in the online Reference Guide.
82
User Preferences
Categories
Category Database Preference Use Single AE/MSFORMS Table Start in Parse All Mode Disable Drag Operations Description If on, single AE and MSFORMS tables are maintained. If on, the parsing function is enabled as MicroStation starts. If on, MicroStation disregards Data button-up operations when the pointer is in views. If on, you can use the ESC key to exit the current command. Sets the size of the searched area around the pointer for selecting an element. Allows a closed, surface or solid element to be located by a data point in the element interior, not just at the edges. Sets the size of the cross hair pointer. Controls the alignment of the pointers cross hairs. Sets how the clicks are interpreted as drag operations versus data points. Default Off
Input
On
Off
Allow ESC key to stop current command Locate Tolerance
On
10
Locate By Face
Rendered Views Only Normal Orthogonal Normal
Pointer Size Pointer Type Click Sensitivity
83
User Preferences
Categories
Category Look and Feel Preference Single Click Description Controls how tools are selected with a single click (press) of the Data button. Sets the tool that is automatically selected upon completion of a one-time function. Sets the color with which tools are highlighted to indicate locked selection. Affects the size of tool boxes. Sets the size of tool icons. Sets the text size, in points, in dialog boxes. If on, the input focus automatically moves to the Tool Settings window when a tool with settings is selected. Unless a tool is selected, its icon appears without a border. Affects the appearance of tool colors. When on, all tool icons are shown in gray-scale except for the selected tool. Opens the Tool Colors dialog box and sets the tool color scheme. Uses the standard Windows file open dialogs instead of the MicroStation file open dialogs. Default Locked
Default Tool
Selection (Element Selection) Gray
Highlight
Layout Tool Size Dialog Font Auto-Focus Tool Settings Window
Regular Small 12 pt. On
Borderless Icons
On
Colorize Only Highlighted Tools
Off
Tool Colors
Default
Use Windows File Open Dialogs
Off
84
User Preferences
Categories
Category Mouse Preference Wheel Ctrl + Wheel Shift + Wheel Pan Ratio Description Sets the mouse wheel to zoom in and out by default. Sets the mouse wheel to pan up and down by default. Sets the mouse wheel to pan left and right by default. Sets the pan ratio increment for each turn of the mouse wheel. Sets the zoom ratio increment for each turn of the mouse wheel. Controls the angle at which radial pan is indexed. Default Zoom In/Out Pan Radial Pan With Zoom 2.000
Zoom Ratio
2.000
Radial Pan Angle
45.00
85
User Preferences
Categories
Category Operation Preference Open Two Application Windows Description If on, two MicroStation application windows are opened for the purpose of using MicroStation on a two-screen system. If on, shows the selected elements in the highlight color rather than with handles. If on, design settings are automatically saved to the DGN file upon closing. If on, MicroStation automatically saves changes to the DGN file. If on, deleted elements are automatically removed from the open DGN file upon closing. If on, when you start MicroStation, it automatically creates and opens a DGN file named untitled.dgn. If on, automatically identifies elements that lose associativity by changing their weight and style. Default Off
Disable Edit Handles
Off
Save Settings on Exit Automatically Save Design Changes Compress File on Exit
Off
On
Off
Enter into Untitled Design
Off
Display Broken Associations with Different Symbology
On
86
User Preferences
Categories
Category Operation Preference Reset Aborts Fence Operations Level Lock Applies for Fence Operations Optimized Fence Clipping Display Active Level in All Views Resource Cache Description If on, Resetting during a fence manipulation halts the operation. If off, fence contents manipulations ignore the Level Lock setting. If on, maintains closed shapes, solids and surfaces when clipping. If on, the active level displays across all views. Sets the amount of memory, in KB, reserved for resources read from MicroStation resource files and application resource files. Sets the maximum size, in KB, of the section of memory reserved for data used to display text elements. Default On
On
On
On 1024
Font Cache
256
87
User Preferences
Categories
Category Raster Manager Preference Display Border Around Selected Raster File Georeference Has Priority when Raster Is Loaded Use Sister File, if Present, for Georeferenced Files Description If on, the selected raster image highlights in the view(s). If on, gives priority for file location information to georeference over attachment. If on, Raster Manager extracts the geo-location from the associated sister/world file (if it exists) for all formats with header information provided the sister/world file has the same prefix and is in the same folder as the image. If on, saves location information only for formats that do not support georeference in a sister file (HGR or ESRI formats). If on, opens raster files as read-only. If on, automatically appends the path of attached raster images to the MS_RFDIR configuration variable. The raster attachments will be searched for in the directories named by the configuration variable. If the toggle is set to off, the paths will not be appended to the variable and the images will be searched for only in the paths already listed in the MS_RFDIR variable. Default On
Off
Off
Save Location Info in Sister File if Required
Off
Open Raster Files Read-Only Update MS_RFDIR Automatically for Raster Attachments
On Off
88
User Preferences
Categories
Category Raster Manager Preference List Raster Attachments from Self References Description If on, all raster attachments are listed in the main Raster Manager dialog box. If a DGN file references itself, the raster attachment will be listed twice. If off, only the raster attachments in the master model will be listed. If on, overrides Projected Coordinate System (PCS) unit with Unit Definition Geokey for Geotiff raster file. If Use Unit Definition Geokey if Present (override PCS unit) is on, defines each Geotiff measurement unit. Defines each measurement unit used with the WorldFile (TFW) sister file. Specifies the number of filenames, from 110, listed in the Raster Manager File menu. Default On
Use Unit Definition Geokey if Present (override PCS unit) Geotiff Default Unit
On
1 Unit = 1 Meters
WorldFile Default Unit Recent Files List Contains
1 Unit = 1 Meters 4
89
User Preferences
Categories
Category Reference Preference Use Color Table Description If off, MicroStation ignores any color table attached to a reference for display purposes. If on, uses colors with the closest color match from the master files color table when copying elements. If off, memory caching of references that are not displayed is disabled. If off, when possible, cached references are kept in memory when one DGN file is closed and another is opened. If off, the results of reference manipulations are immediately permanent. If on, the Update Sequence menu item is disabled in the Attachment Settings dialog boxs Settings menu. Default On
Remap Colors on Copy
On
Cache When Display Off Reload When Changing Files
Off
Off
Save Settings to Save Changes Ignore Update Sequence
Off
Off
810
User Preferences
Categories
Category Reference Preference Allow Editing of Self References Description If on, you can modify self-attached reference elements, and the changes will be incrementally displayed. Controls how levels in references are copied to the active model. Copy only levels that dont exist in the active model (If Not Found), copy levels if the active model settings are different from the attachments settings (If Overrides Exist), or copy all levels from a reference into the active model (Always). If on, the capability to identify elements in a newly attached reference is enabled by default. If on, the capability to snap to elements in a newly attached reference is enabled by default. If on, the capability to align the units in the active model to the units in a newly attached reference is enabled by default. If on, scaling is applied to components of custom line styles in a newly attached reference by default. Default On
Copy Levels During Copy
If Not Found
Locate
On
Snap
On
True Scale
On
Scale Line Styles
On
811
User Preferences
Categories
Category Reference Preference Display Raster References Ignore When Live Nesting Description If on, a newly attached raster reference is displayed by default. If on, the References dialog box does not list nested references in its entry for a newly attached reference by default. If on, source lighting cells in a newly attached reference are processed while rendering by default. If on, the relative path to a newly attached reference is saved in the attachment information by default. Allows you to ignore (No Nesting), continuously update (Live Nesting), or copy nested attachments. Sets the number of levels of nested attachments that are included when attaching a reference. Default On
Off
Use Lights
On
Save Relative Path
Off
Nesting
No Nesting
Nest Depth
812
User Preferences
Categories
Category Spelling Preference Case Sensitive Description Treats words with different letter-case patterns as different words. Flags words that appear to be better suited as two words. Flags words that appear twice in the same row. Ignores words that appear to be Internet domain names. Ignores words with an unusual mixture of upper and lowercase letters. An example of a usual mixture might be words like MicroStation. An unusual mixture might be something like MiCroSTAtioN. Ignores words that contain a mixture of letters, digits, or other symbols. Ignore words consisting of all uppercase letters. Ignores words that begin with an uppercase letter. Sets the supported language that Spell Checker will use. Default On
Suggest split words Report double words Ignore domain names Ignore mixed case
On On Off On
Ignore words with numbers Ignore words in UPPERCASE Ignore capitalize words Language
On
Off Off AmericanEnglish
813
User Preferences
Categories
Category Tags Preference Prompt on Duplicate Tag Sets Description If on, when a tag set exists in the DGN file with the same name as a tag set in a cell library that contains a cell being placed, an alert box is displayed to confirm the replacement of the DGN file version of the tag set with the cell library version. If on, tag sets in the DGN file cannot be replaced by tag sets of the same names in cell libraries from which cells are placed. If on, when a tag set is attached to an element, all tags in the set become members of the same graphic group. Default On
Use Design File Tag Sets by Default
Off
Place Tags in Same Graphic Group
On
814
User Preferences
Categories
Category Text Preference Display Text with Line Styles Description If off, text in traditional MicroStation fonts is displayed with the standard Solid line style. If off, MicroStation places fitted text by enlarging or shrinking the characters of text so that they fit between two data points. If off, the spacing between characters is measured from the end of one character to the beginning of the next character. If on, any text that was placed as a text node will remain a text node, even if edited down to one line. If off, the odd space in a center-justified enter data field containing an odd number of extra blank spaces is positioned at the beginning of the enter data field. Default Off
Fit Text by Inserting Space
Off
Fixed-Width Character Spacing
Off
Preserve Text Nodes
Off
Justify Enter Data Fields Like IGDS
Off
815
User Preferences
Categories
Category Text Preference ED Character Description Sets the text character that denotes each character in an enter data field. Sets the size threshold, in pixels, above which text is drawn. Sets the distance, as a percentage of the text height, between the baseline and underlining. Sets the ASCII character used to display the degree symbol ( ). Sets the type of text editing interface: Word Processor, Dialog Box, WYSIWYG, or Key-in. Determines how missing fonts are listed in font selection combo boxes. Default _ (underbar) 4
Smallest Text
Underline Spacing (%)
20
Degree Display Char(acter) Text Editor Style
176
Word Processor
Missing Fonts
Enable (automatic replacement with available fonts)
816
User Preferences
Categories
Category View Options Preference Scroll Bars on View Windows Description If on, view windows are displayed with borders, including scroll bars and view control bars. If on, the view background color, if set to black, is displayed in white. If off, four views are tiled in the same manner as in IGDS. If on, MicroStation attempts to open views based on the aspect ratio of views from the last saved version. It only applies if you have changed the size of MicroStations application area since saving a file. Sets the frequency (in seconds) of the display update when rendering. Affects the brightness of rendered images. Sets the maximum number of displayable grid points in a view, counted horizontally. Sets the maximum number of displayable grid references (crosses) in a view, counted horizontally. Sets the display width (in pixels) for each of the 32 line weights. Default On
Black Background -> White Tile Counter Clockwise Preserve Aspect Ratio of Views
Off
Off Off
Update Frequency (secs) Gamma Correction Max. Grid Pts/View Max. Grid Refs/View
0.5
1.00 90
40
Line Weights
1:1
General Procedure To set user preferences

1. From the Workspace menu, choose Preferences. The Preferences dialog box opens. Database is selected in
817
User Preferences
Categories
the Category list box.
2. To help you and other users identify these preferences collectively as a workspace component, key in a description of the preferences in the field adjacent to the top of the Category list box. 3. In the Category list box, select a category that contains a preference you want to set. The controls for setting preferences in that Category are displayed in the dialog box. 4. Use the controls to set the desired preferences. Clicking the Line Weights button in the View Options category opens a dialog box for setting the display widths for element line weights; for information about setting these preferences, see Line weight translation (see page 8-19). 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you finish setting preferences. 6. Click the OK button.
818
User Preferences
Line weight translation
To set all preferences to the defaults for the active workspace user interface component
1. In the Preferences dialog boxs Database category, click the Defaults button. 2. Click the OK button.

Each of the 32 possible values of element line weight can be set to display with any width you want. Display widths are measured in pixels (screen dots).
To set the display widths for element line weights

1. In the Preferences dialog boxs View Options category, click the Line Weights button. The Line Weight Translation dialog box opens.
819
User Preferences
2. In the Screen section, select the screen Right (primary) or Left (secondary) for which you want to set display widths (for dual-screen systems). 3. For each line weight in the Design column whose display width you want to change, key in the desired width, in pixels, in the corresponding Display field. or To set the Design: Display values collectively to a 1:1 ratio, click the 1:1 button. or To set the Design: Display values collectively to a 1.5:1 ratio, click the 1.5:1 button. or To set the Design: Display values collectively to a 2:1 ratio, click the 2:1 button. 4. (Optional) To set the display widths for the second screen, select the second screen in the Screen section and repeat step 3. 5. Click the Apply button to save changes without dismissing the dialog box. 6. Click the OK button to save changes and to dismiss the dialog box. This returns you to the Preferences dialog box. The changes will be effective regardless of whether you click OK or Cancel in the Preferences dialog box.
820
Part II: Tutorial
Your First Session

These exercises cover the most basic procedures in MicroStation.
This exercise covers starting MicroStation and introduces you to some basic fundamentals.
Before you begin, if this really is your first MicroStation session, and you havent restarted your system since you installed MicroStation, please restart your system now. Then come back to this tutorial.
Start MicroStation
1. Open the MicroStation program group in the Windows Program Manager. 2. Depending on your operating system setup, single or double-click the
91
Your First Session

MicroStation icon in the MicroStation program group. When MicroStation starts, the MicroStation Manager dialog box displays.
You can use the MicroStation Manager dialog box for many file management operations. Here, we will look at how to create a new DGN file. When you create a new DGN file in MicroStation, a seed file is copied and given the name that you specify. A number of seed files are delivered with MicroStation. By default, the system is set up to use the seed file seed2D.dgn, which is set up for 2D drafting.
Create a DGN file

1. Open MicroStation Managers File menu by pointing at File in the
92
Your First Session

menu bar and clicking the mouse button.
If you are using a Mouse Tablet cursor The Data button is The mouse button (normally left button) See Graphical input with a digitizing tablet on page 6-22
2. From the File menu, choose New by clicking that menu item. To click an item in a menu, or a button, or an icon, means to point at it on the screen and click the mouse data button. The New dialog box opens. Notice that the Seed File displays the name of the default seed file seed2D.dgn. (If not, click the Select button and select seed2d.dgn from the Select Seed File dialog box, then click OK).
3. In the Files text field, type the name for your new DGN file, mydesign. By default, the extension .dgn will be added. 4. Click OK. The New dialog box closes, and the MicroStation Manager dialog box displays mydesign.dgn in the Files text field. The file is also
93
Your First Session

selected (highlighted) in the Files list box.
5. Click OK. 6. The MicroStation Manager dialog box closes and the DGN file mydesign.dgn opens. Your screen should look something like this:
94
Your First Session

Using a drawing tool

A MicroStation model, in a DGN file, is composed of elements such as lines, ellipses, and arcs.
Place a line element with the Place Line tool

1. Point at the Place SmartLine tool in the Main tool frame and press and hold
95
Your First Session

down the Data button. (On the mouse, Data is the left button.)
The Place SmartLine tool highlights and additional, connected tools branch off from the Place SmartLine tool. 2. As you continue to hold down the Data button, drag the pointer toward the center of view window 1. As you drag, a rectangular outline of the additional tools displays. 3. Release the Data button.
The rectangular outline becomes the Linear Elements tool box, which contains Place SmartLine and several other tools. You have torn the Linear Elements tool box from the Main tool frame. 4. In the Linear Elements tool box, point at the Place Line tool (next to the
96
Your First Session

Place SmartLine tool) and click (press and release) the Data button.
The Place Line tool now is selected. There are several visible effects: the tool name displays in the status bar, and the title bar of the tool settings window now reads Place Line. In the Main tool frame, Place Line replaces Place SmartLine. When you move the pointer into view window 1, the pointer changes from an arrow to a crosshair. 5. Press and hold down the Data button as you move the pointer in view window 1. The pointer assumes the shape of an X and a line starts from the position at which you pressed the data button. As you drag the pointer, the line you are placing dynamically displays as though it were a rubber band attached to the pointer. This effect is called dynamic update or rubberbanding. 6. Release the Data button to complete the placement of the line. If the line appears jagged, do not be concerned. The screen may not have enough dots (pixels) to display this particular line without jaggies. When you plot the line (as in the illustration), it will be straight.
The pointer locations where you pressed and released the Data button are called data points. These data points, labeled 1 and 2 in the above illustration, specify the endpoints of the line. The Place Line tool is still selected, as indicated in the status bar. The tool is locked. You can place additional lines simply by repeating steps 5 and 6 above. Experienced users like to lock tools as a means of increasing efficiency. (You can select tools without locking them by double-clicking them. That is, pointing at them and clicking the Data button twice in quick succession.) Lets get back to placing elements. When you enter a series of data points, one after the other, you can press (and release) the Data button to enter each
97
Your First Session

one. You may find this drawing method easier than dragging.
Place a line by pressing the Data button to enter each data point instead of dragging
1. Press (and release) the Data button to enter a data point in view window 1. This defines the first point of the line, which dynamically displays as you move the pointer. 2. Press (and release) to enter a second data point in view window 1 to complete the line.
A new line dynamically displays as you move the crosshair pointer. The dynamic line extends from the end of the line you just placed. 3. Enter another data point in view window 1, to place a second connected line. Again, the dynamic line extends from the end of the new line you just placed. If you were to continue entering additional data points now, you would have several connected lines. (They would be separate elements, but with common endpoints.) Lets say you want to start a new line at another location.
Place a new line at another location

1. Press the Reset button. (On the mouse, Reset normally is the right button.) This is called entering a Reset or Resetting. Notice that the dynamic line no longer appears from the last data point to the pointer location. 2. Enter a data point in view window 1. 3. Enter a second data point to place the new line. The Place Line tool is like most element placement tools in that, when you use it, you enter a series of two or more data points.
98
Your First Session

Placing line strings and circles
For entering each data point, you can choose between dragging and pressing the Data button, and these techniques can be used in combination. You can Reset to start an element at a different location. Now that you have learned these techniques, place some more lines for practice, and then continue with the next exercise.

You have just seen how easy it is to place a series of connected line elements (that is, line elements with common end points) with the Place Line tool. It is preferable, though, to place connected line segments as a single line string so they can be directly manipulated (copied, moved, deleted, and so on) as a group. The Place SmartLine tool is used to place a line string.
Placing a line string with Place SmartLine is much like placing a series of connected line elements. As you might expect, a data point defines each vertex (corner) of the line string. You then enter a Reset to signal MicroStation that you are finished defining the vertices.
Place a line string

1. In the Linear Elements tool box, select the Place SmartLine tool (that is, point at the tool and click the Data button).
The Place SmartLine tool is selected. The prompt in the status bar reads Place SmartLine > Enter first vertex. 2. Enter a data point (press and release the Data button) in view window 1 to define a vertex. The first segment of the line string dynamically displays as you move the crosshair pointer. 3. Enter several more data points to define additional vertices.
99
Your First Session

4. Reset (press the right mouse button). The line string is placed. The Place SmartLine tool is one of the few tools with which you cannot Reset to start over at a different location. This is because a line string can have many segments, and Resetting is how you indicate to MicroStation that the line string is complete.
Place a circle by its center

1. In the Main tool frame, select the Place Circle tool.
2. Check in the tool settings window, whose title bar now reads Place Circle to make sure Method is set to Center. (If Method is not set to Center then point at the Method option menu, click the Data button, and then click Center.)
910
Your First Session

The prompt in the status bar reads Place Circle By Center > Identify Center Point. 3. Enter a data point in view window 1 to define the center of the circle. The pointer changes to crosshairs. The circle dynamically displays as you move the crosshair pointer. 4. Enter a data point to define the circles edge and to place the circle.
Placing a circle by its center
There are other ways to place a circle by drawing from edge to edge, for instance, as you will see in a moment. In fact, there is more than one way to place most element types.
Place a circle by its edge

1. In the tool settings window, set Method to Edge. Point at the Method option menu, click the Data button, and then click Edge.
The prompt in the status bar is Place Circle By Edge > Identify Point on Circle. 2. Enter a data point (press and release the Data button) in view window 1 to define a point on the edge of the circle. 3. Enter a second data point to define another point on the edge of the circle. Small squares mark the locations of both edge points. A circle passing
911
Your First Session

Placing text
through both points and the location of the pointer dynamically displays. 4. Enter a data point to define a third point on the edge of the circle and place the circle.
Placing a circle by its edge
Place some more circles. Try both dragging and pressing for entering data points. Because the Edge Method setting requires three data points, you cannot drag to enter them all.
Placing text
You can use text to annotate and label a model, to show part numbers, to indicate geometric tolerancing, to display data associated with graphical elements, to include instructions or explanations for other members of a workgroup, and to relate other information that cannot conveniently be conveyed graphically.
Place a text element

1. In the Main tool frame, select the Place Text tool (its icon is the letter A).
The Text Editor window opens.
2. In the Text Editor window, type the text you want to place.
912
Your First Session

Getting help
3. Move the pointer to where you want to place the text in view window 1. The text in the Text Editor window displays dynamically as you move the pointer. (The text may be too large to fit in view window 1, but it will all be placed.) 4. Enter a data point (press and release the Data button) to place the text. After placing the text, a copy of it still is attached to the pointer.
5. Press the Reset button to clear the text (from the pointer).
Getting help
MicroStation has an extensive online help system that features hypertext links between topics. The system can be set to provide help on each tool you select. You can browse help topics and search for topic names. You can also print individual help articles.
913
Your First Session

Getting help
Browse help topics

1. In the Standard tool box under the main menu bar, click the ? (Help) icon. or From the Help menu, select Contents.
The Help window opens, and the Table of Contents displays. The Help window is divided into two frames. The left frame or Table of Contents frame displays the list of available topics. The right frame or Document Body frame displays the text associated with the currently selected topic.
2. In the Table of Contents window, click the topic for which
914
Your First Session

Getting help
you need further information. A list of subtopics displays. 3. Continue expanding the list of subtopics until you reach the desired topic. On the Contents tab, select the desired help topic. The associated help article displays in the contents frame to the right. The article itself contains hypertext.
Find the right tool to construct a chamfer

1. Click the Search tab. 2. In the Search field, type construct a chamfer. 3. Click the List Topics button. A number of hits displays in the list box. The one titled Construct Chamfer is the most likely candidate. 4. In the list box, select Construct Chamfer and click the Display button. The help article on the Construct Chamfer tool displays in the contents frame. Tracking gives you help on each tool you select. This is a quick way to find help for a tool, particularly if you cant find it via the menu selections. For each new tool you select, the help automatically displays in the Help window.
915
Your First Session

Deleting elements
Turn on Tracking and get help on the next tool you will use, Place Block
1. From the Help menu, choose Tracking.
Tracking is now enabled. When tracking is on, the Help window displays information about the tool you select. 2. In the Polygons tool box from the Main tool frame, select the Place Block tool.
Help on Place Block displays in the Help window.
3. When you have finished, close the Help window (click the X button at top right of the Help window). 4. From the Help menu, again choose Tracking, to turn it off.
Deleting elements
By now view window 1 is crowded with elements, so we will delete some of them. How you do this can depend on how your system is set up, and whether or not AccuSnap is enabled, along with Identify Elements Automatically. AccuSnap is an intelligent element locating feature of MicroStation. Here we will delete elements both without and then with AccuSnap enabled.
916
Your First Session

Deleting elements
To turn off AccuSnap

1. From the Settings menu, click Snaps, and then in the submenu, click AccuSnap. The AccuSnap Settings dialog box opens. 2. If the Enable AccuSnap check box has a check mark in it, click it to make it disappear. This turns off AccuSnap. If you dont have a check mark displayed, then it already is turned off on your system. 3. In the Main tool box, select the Delete Element tool. 4. Place the pointer over one of the elements and enter a data point. The element highlights, to show you that it is selected. 5. In a blank part of the view, enter a second data point. The element is deleted.
To delete a line
1. In the Main tool frame, select the Delete Element tool. 2. Select the line you want to delete by pointing at it and pressing (and releasing) the Data button. The line highlights to indicate that it is selected. If you selected the wrong element enter a Reset, or if you did not select any element, try again. 3. In a blank part of the view, enter a second data point to complete the deletion. Now we will look at deleting elements, with AccuSnap and automatic element identification enabled.
Turn on AccuSnap
1. From the Settings menu, click Snaps, and then in the
917
Your First Session

Deleting elements
submenu, click AccuSnap. The AccuSnap Settings dialog box opens. 2. Turn on Enable AccuSnap (click the item, or the check box, to display the check mark for the setting). 3. If necessary, turn on Identify Elements Automatically. 4. Close the AccuSnap Settings window. 5. In the Main tool frame, select the Delete Element tool. 6. Move the pointer around the view window and notice how the elements highlight as the pointer passes over them. 7. Move the pointer to the element that you want to delete and, when it highlights, enter a data point. The element is deleted. Unlike the previous exercise, only one data point was required this time because AccuSnap identified and highlighted the element for you. You didnt have to enter a data point to identify the element first.
If you delete the wrong element, you can undo the mistake.
Undelete the element

1. Press Ctrl-Z. (That is, while holding down the Ctrl key, press the Z key.) This is the same as choosing Undo from the Edit menu. Ctrl-Z is the keyboard accelerator for that menu item. The element displays where it was before it was deleted. 2. Repeat step 1 to undelete the line you deleted first. You can undo element placement, manipulation, and modification operations. It is possible to undo multiple operations in MicroStation. The first undoable operation is shown as part of the Undo item in the Edit menu. Similarly, the first redoable operation is shown as part of the Redo item in the same menu. When you delete an element, the element remains in the DGN file even though you cannot see it.
918
Your First Session

Using key-ins
Using key-ins
You can select a tool by clicking it, and you can also select a tool by entering a key-in in the Key-in window. To key in means to type text in the Key-in windows key-in field and press Enter or click the Key-in button. Some MicroStation functions, namely the set of utilities known as special key-ins, can be activated only by key-in.
Open the Key-in window

1. From the Utilities menu, choose Key-in. (This instruction is shorthand for Point at Utilities in the main menu bar; click the Data button to open the menu; and click the Key-in item.) The Key-in window opens.
When you use the keyboard, the text you type goes into the window that has the input focus. The title bar of the window that has the input focus title is highlighted. If a dialog box has the input focus when you want to enter a key-in in the Key-in window, you must first give the Key-in window the input focus. To do this, press Esc or click in the Key-in window. The MicroStation key-in language is composed of a hierarchy of English keywords. For example, keying in PLACE CIRCLE CENTER CONSTRAINED selects the Place Circle tool and sets the tools Method to Center; PLACE CIRCLE EDGE CONSTRAINED, the Place Circle tool with Method set to Edge; and DELETE ELEMENT, the Delete Element tool.
919
Your First Session

Saving a DGN file
A powerful feature of Key-ins is the ability of the MicroStation software to recognize and complete commands. For example, if you key in ACC and hit the space bar, the rest of ACCUDRAW will be filled in on the text line.
You can abbreviate key-ins for example, PLACE CIRCLE CENTER CONSTRAINED can be abbreviated to PLA CI C C and PLACE CIRCLE EDGE CONSTRAINED to PLA CI E C. (You can shorten the key-in by omitting letters at the ends of words as long as the abbreviation is unique, so MicroStation understands which key-in you are abbreviating.) You do not need to use uppercase letters.
Select Place Circle and set its Method to Center with a key-in
1. With the input focus in the Key-in window, key in PLA CI C C (type the text and then press Enter). The prompt in the status bar reads Place Circle By Center > Identify Center Point. While the key-in area of the Key-in window has the input focus, you can recall previous key-ins by pressing the key (up arrow). Another way to recall a previous key-in is to select it in the list box at the bottom of the window. In this documentation, depending on the context, the instruction, Key in may mean that text is to be keyed in fields in other windows, such as dialog boxes.
Saving a DGN file

The standard Save and Save As items in MicroStations File menu are used to save the active DGN file.
920
Your First Session

Ending the session
Save (and rename) the active DGN file

1. From the File menu, choose Save As. The Save As dialog box opens. 2. In the Files field, key in a new filename. The default extension for DGN files is .dgn. 3. Use the Directories list box to specify the destination directory. 4. Use the Drives option menu to specify the destination disk drive. 5. Click OK. The file is saved. The MicroStation windows title bar shows the new filename.
Ending the session

When you have completed your design session, you can close the DGN file and exit MicroStation in one operation.
Exit MicroStation
1. From the File menu, choose Exit. or In the Key-in window, key in EXIT. or In the Key-in window, key in QUIT. or Press Alt-F then press X.
921
922
Workflow Basics
This tutorial covers the fundamentals of using view controls to navigate in your models. It also gives you an idea of the flow of MicroStation. For example, you will see how you can interrupt a drawing tool to use a view control and then return to the drawing tool at the point where work was interrupted.
This tutorial is structured as a series of exercises that are meant to be performed consecutively. You will learn about:
Backing up a DGN file (see page 10-1) Fitting the active model (see page 10-3) Windowing areas of the model (see page 10-4) Zooming and panning (see page 10-8) Interrupting a drawing tool to use a view control (see page 10-10)
In each exercise, it is assumed that you have just completed the preceding exercise.
Backing up a DGN file

This tutorial uses a copy of the DGN file Office.dgn. You will rename the file to off_bak.dgn and work with the renamed file. The original file remains unaltered so it can be used with a subsequent tutorial.
Open the DGN file Office.dgn

1. Start MicroStation, or if it is running already, from the File
101
Workflow Basics
Backing up a DGN file
menu, choose Open. Either the MicroStation Manager dialog box or the Open dialog box opens. 2. In the Directories list box, navigate to Bentleys Workspace\projects\examples\Architectural\dgn directory if that directorys files are not already listed. 3. In the Files list box, select "Office.dgn". 4. Click OK. Window 1 shows a receptionists desk in a lobby. The 2D model includes the floor plan of an entire floor of an office building.
Create the backup file

1. From the File menu, choose Save As. The Save As dialog box opens.
2. In the Files field, key in off_bak.dgn. 3. Click OK. The backup file off_bak.dgn is created and opened as the active DGN file. Recall that the MicroStation windows title bar identifies the active DGN file. All the sample files supplied with MicroStation are backed up on the
102
Workflow Basics
Fitting the active model
delivery media. If you want to start over with one, reinstall the sample files. (If there are any sample files that you do not want overwritten during reinstallation, rename them or move them to another directory.)
Fitting the active model

As you move view windows about on the screen, the contents of the views stay the same. View controls are used to change the model display in each view. View controls are located in the view control bar on the bottom border of each view window.
Display the entire model in view window 1

1. Select the Fit View view control by clicking it in the windows view control bar.
The entire model is fitted in view window 1. Notice that the Fit View view control remains selected.
2. In the center of the model, locate the receptionists desk in the lobby. You will use this location later in this tutorial.
103
Workflow Basics
Windowing areas of the model
While using the view controls, if you lose the model and find yourself looking at an empty view, use the Fit View view control to locate your model.

For this exercise, you will use view window 1 to refer to the entire floor plan and open a second view window to examine details. At the end of this
104
Workflow Basics
exercise, the two open view windows will look similar to this:
Resize view window 1 and fit the entire model in it

1. Position the pointer over the lower right corner of view window 1s border. When the pointer is precisely over the corner of the window border, it becomes a diagonal double arrow.
105
Workflow Basics
2. When the pointer becomes a diagonal double arrow, press (and hold down) the Data button, and drag the corner upward and to the left until the view window occupies only the upper left quadrant of the screen. 3. Re-select the Fit View view control to again display the entire model in view window 1. Having fitted the entire model, you can see that it includes a border and reference lines that extend far beyond the floor plan. There is no need to see these in their entirety in view window 1.
Window the area that contains the floor plan

1. Select the Window Area view control.
Window Area is used to enlarge a part of the model to fill an entire view window. The pointer changes to a large X. In the Tool Settings window, Apply to Window is set to (view window) 1.
2. Position the pointer inside view window 1 just above and to the left of the floor plan. Then press (and release) the Data button to enter a data point there. As you move the pointer, a rectangular box indicating the area to be fit dynamically displays.
106
Workflow Basics
3. Position the pointer just below and to the right of the floor plan, and again enter a data point. The box disappears, and the defined area fills the view.
Open another view window and display a detail of the model in it

1. From the Window menus Views submenu, choose (view window) 2.
107
Workflow Basics
Zooming and panning
View window 2 opens. 2. Move and resize view window 2, by dragging it by its title bar and dragging its resize borders, so that it fills the entire right half of the screen. Note that the Window Area view control remains selected. 3. In the Tool Settings window, turn on Apply to Window, and choose (view window) 2 from option menu. 4. Enter two data points in view window 1 to define the area around the conference table in the upper left quadrant of the floor plan. You can either press the Data button for each data point or drag the pointer while holding down the Data button. Notice that the window area shape has the aspect ratio of view window 2, because this is the window to which the tool is applying the new viewing parameter. The defined area displays in view window 2. 5. Repeat step 4 to examine other details of the model (such as a stairwell or work cubicle). The smaller the area you define in view window 1, the greater the magnification in view window 2. 6. Repeat step 4 to window the receptionists desk. The receptionists desk is between two beams in the lower half of the central lobby of the office building.
Zooming and panning

Other view controls, Zoom Out and Zoom In, also let you increase or reduce the scale at which part of a model is displayed in a view. The zoom controls have effects similar to a zoom lens on a camera, magnifying or shrinking an image.
Experiment with the Zoom Out and Zoom In view controls

1. In the view control bar in the border of view window 2, select the Zoom In view control (its icon is a + sign). Notice that the tool setting for Zoom Ratio is 2.00. 2. In view window 2, enter a data point in the center of the keyboard on the receptionists desk.
When you zoom in or out, the point at which you enter the data point becomes the views center. Therefore, the center of the keyboard displays at the center
108
Workflow Basics
Zooming and panning
of view window 2, and the size of each element displayed in the view doubles. 3. In the view control bar in the border of view window 2, select the Zoom Out view control (its icon is a sign).
The size of the displayed elements is halved. That is, they are sized as they were before you zoomed in.
4. Again select Zoom Out. The size of the displayed elements again is halved.
Undo and redo the last zoom operation

1. In the view control bar in the border of view window 2, select the View Previous view control (its icon is a curved arrow pointing to the left).
View window 2 returns to its state prior to the last zoom operation.
2. Select the View Next view control, which is located immediately to the right of View Previous in the view control bar.
View window 2 returns to its state prior to the use of View Previous. A convenient way to change the part of the model displayed in a view without changing the magnification is to dynamically pan (like zoom, a camera metaphor) in a view.
The dynamic panning procedure does not lend itself to step-by-step description, so it is recommended that you review the next procedure in its entirety before starting to perform it.
109
Workflow Basics
Interrupting a drawing tool to use a view control
Pan dynamically within View 2

1. Position the pointer near the center of view window 2. 2. Hold down the Shift key while you press and hold down the Data button to define the anchor point. (You can then release the Shift key, but keep the Data button depressed.) The anchor point is a point in the view window, not a point in the model. It is not displayed. 3. While keeping the Data button depressed, drag the pointer a short distance directly to the right of the anchor point. The view window begins to pan (shift) across the model in the direction you dragged the pointer. The farther you drag the pointer from the anchor point, the faster the panning occurs. You also control the direction of the panning by dragging the pointer. Imagine an arrow starting at the anchor point and ending wherever you drag the pointer. Panning follows the direction of the imaginary arrow, and the panning speed increases with the length of the imaginary arrow. Panning stops when you release the Data button.

Suppose you wanted to draw a line diagonally across the floor plan from the steel I-beam in the upper left corner to the I-beam in the lower right corner. The I-beams are small relative to the distance between them and are surrounded by other elements in the model. If you had to draw the line in a single view, you would not be able to accurately place the ends of the line on the I-beams. With MicroStation, you can solve this problem by interrupting your drawing to use the view controls.
View a detail of the upper left I-beam in view window 2 and start to place a line
1. Use the Window Area view control to display a small rectangle containing the upper left corner of the floor plan in view window 2.
1010
Workflow Basics
The I-beam is gray and is located at the intersection of the two dashed, green lines just inside the corner of the floor plan. (If you cannot see the I-beam, use the Zoom Out view control to increase the portion of the model visible in view window 2. When you find the I-beam, use the Zoom In view control to increase the magnification again and to display the I-beam in the center of the view window.)
2. In the Linear Elements tool box, select the Place Line tool. 3. Enter a data point at the intersection of the two dashed lines
1011
Workflow Basics
that cross the I-beam. The prompt in the status bar is Enter end point.
4. Move the pointer around in both view windows without pressing the Data button. As you move the pointer, MicroStation dynamically displays a line from the I-beam to the pointer location. However, if you position the pointer directly over a view windows resize border, the line no longer displays and the pointer becomes a double arrow. Even though the Place Line tool is selected, and you have placed the first point of the line, you can interrupt the drawing of the line to carry out other tasks such as resize view windows, change settings, and use the view controls. Having completed the other tasks, you can then reset to return to drawing the line, as follows.
Window the lower right I-beam and finish placing the line
1. With the Place Line tool still active, select the Window Area view control. 2. Use the Window Area view control to display a small rectangle containing
1012
Workflow Basics
the lower right corner of the floor plan in view window 2. While the Window Area view control is selected, the title of the Tool Settings window is Window Area. 3. Reset. (Recall the Reset button is the right mouse button.) The Window Area view control is de-selected, and the Place Line tool is reselected, at the point where you were prior to using the Window Area view control. 4. Finish placing the line: In view window 2, enter a data point at the intersection of the two dashed lines over the I-beam in the lower right corner of the floor plan.
5. Reset to finish.
1013
Workflow Basics
Undo placement of the line

1. In the Standard tool box, click the Undo icon (the icon looks much like the View Previous).
The line disappears, and the message in the status bar reads Place Line > <Place Line> Undone.
1014
Glossary
A
absolute accept AccuDraw AccuSnap The relative setting that places a graphic cell on the same level on which it was created. To click the Data button to approve the placement of a data point at the location of a tentative point or to confirm the identification of an element that is highlighted. Drafting aid used to apply precision to geometry without affecting the flow of drafting or sacrificing the interactivity afforded by dynamic update. A snapping mode that may be used by itself, or in combination with AccuDraw, to reduce the number of button presses required during a design session. AccuSnap provides graphical assistance a smart pointer for snapping to elements. See auxiliary coordinate system. A setting that, when turned on, forces each data point to lie on the XY-plane of the active auxiliary coordinate system, setting all Z-coordinates to zero. This concept applies only to 3D files. A setting that, when turned on, causes MicroStation to try to find a point on the XY-plane of the active auxiliary coordinate system to snap to when a tentative point is entered. This lock applies only to 3D files. At the time an auxiliary coordinate system is defined, MicroStation displays this three-arrow representation (in 3D) to indicate the X- and Y-axes and origin. Defines the action MicroStation performs when a tool is selected or a menu item is chosen. The angle, in degrees, used with cell placement and text placement tools that require an angle specification. The setting that determines the color, line style, and line weight of an element upon placement. The cell that is placed with the cell placement tools. The class (primary or construction) of an element upon placement. DGN files are normally composed of primary elements. Construction elements are usually placed to help place primary elements and are usually not plotted. The setting that determines the color of an element upon placement. The set of up to 256 colors from which the active color can be selected. The active color table is modified, attached, and saved in the Color Table dialog box.
ACS ACS plane lock
ACS plane snap lock
ACS triad action string active angle active attributes active cell active class
active color active color table
MicroStation QuickStart Guide G1
Glossary
A
active command active control indicator active depth The command that has most recently been activated from a tool box, menu, or key-in. The dotted rectangle that indicates the input focus in dialog boxes. The depth within the view cube of the plane upon which data points are entered. The plane is perpendicular to the Z-axis of the view. There is an active depth associated with each view. The DGN file currently opened for viewing and/or manipulation. The row in the database table that is linked to a graphic element when a database attachment is executed. The setting that determines the font of a text element upon placement. The setting that determines the level upon which an element is placed. The setting that determines the angle at which the active pattern cell is placed by Pattern Area, the angle of the lines placed using Hatch Area, or two settings that determine the angles of the lines placed using Crosshatch Area. The setting that determines the cell that is used for patterning. The setting that determines the scale at which the active pattern cell is placed during area patterning and linear patterning. The distance(s) between adjacent pattern cells placed using Pattern Area. The distance(s) between lines placed using Hatch Area or Crosshatch Area. The setting that determines whether a cell, symbol, or zero-length line is drawn by the point placement tools. The setting that determines the amount of scaling applied to a cell when placed, to selected elements, or to the fence contents when using Scale. The scale factors in the X-, Y-, or Z-direction can be identical or each can be different. The setting that determines the line style of an element upon placement. The setting that determines the height of text upon placement. The setting that determines the width of text upon placement. The setting that determines the line weight of an element upon placement. Dimensions that conform to architectural, engineering, and construction conventions. To make one view display the same area (in 2D) or the same volume (in 3D) as another view.
active DGN file active entity active font active level active pattern angle(s)
active pattern cell active pattern scale active pattern spacing active point active scale factor(s)
active line style active text height active text width active line weight AEC dimension format align view
G2 MicroStation QuickStart Guide
Glossary
A
alphanumeric alternate key-in ambient light application software A string of characters that takes the form of letters, numbers, and some symbols (e.g. @, $, and punctuation). A short cut way to enter a key-in command. For example, AA= is an alternate key-in for ACTIVE ANGLE. Light that emanates from all directions, and thus illuminates all surfaces equally, regardless of their orientation. Software that allows you to more efficiently perform specific tasks with MicroStation. These applications include: MDL applications, key-in scripts, and macros. A regularly curved open element that has a constant radius around a single center point. Whether an area is a solid or a hole. See fill. Placement of the active pattern cell (at the active pattern angle, scale, and spacing) in an area bounded by a shape, ellipse, circle, fence, or complex shape. The cell is repeated in a rectangular array spacing as many times as necessary to fill the area. Height divided by width. Dimensions that update automatically as the element they dimension is modified. The setting that, when turned on, causes element associations to be created when an element is snapped to while using Place Multi-line, a dimensioning tool, or a cell placement tool (with Use Shared Cells on). A point created by snapping while using Place Multi-line, a dimensioning tool, or a cell placement tool (with Use Shared Cells on) when Association Lock is turned on. An association point does not have its own coordinates, but is positioned by the coordinates of the point it is associated with. To activate a (paper, cursor button, or sidebar) menu. To define (a cell library, color table, or reference) for use with a DGN file. Line color, line style, line weight, and fill color (for closed elements). A coordinate system with user-specified origin and orientation that can be defined, activated, saved, and recalled during a design session.
arc area attribute area filling area patterning
aspect ratio associated dimensions association lock
association point
attach attributes auxiliary coordinate system (ACS)
Glossary
A
axis increment The setting that determines, in conjunction with axis start angle, the possible axes for data points when Axis Lock is on. For example, if axis increment is 45 degrees and axis start angle is 0 degrees, the possible axes are 0, 45, 90, 135, 180, 225, 270, and 315 degrees. The lock that forces data points to be placed at axes that are at specific angles from the most recent data point or tentative point, constraining the movement of elements or placement to multiples of the Axis Increment from the Axis Start Angle. The axis about which an object is revolved by the commands that create surfaces and volumes of revolution. This concept is used in 3D designs. The setting that determines (in conjunction with axis increment) the possible axes for data points when Axis Lock is on. For example, if axis increment is 60 degrees and axis start angle is 30 degrees, the possible axes are 30, 90, 150, 210, 270, and 330 degrees.
axis lock
axis of revolution axis start angle
B
B-spline curve B-spline surface balanced colors Bzier curve bitmap block boreline A free-form, parametrically defined curve in which each pole (vertex) has an influence over a defined range of the curve. A free-form, parametrically defined surface in which each pole (vertex) has an influence over a defined range of the surface. A representative spread of colors evenly spaced across the color spectrum. A B-spline curve with the same number of poles as its Order. Pixel oriented (raster) data. Bitmaps are created by capturing an image on the screen (hardware) or can be generated by an algorithm (software). A rectangular shape. When a 3D tentative point is entered in a particular view, a reference line perpendicular to the plane of that view is created. The boreline sets the coordinates of the plane in which it is defined for snapping in other views. Thus, in views where the boreline appears as a line, a data point snaps to a location on the boreline, ignoring the active depth. A setting that, when turned on, allows location of any element that lies near a boreline at the position of the pointer. With Boresite Lock turned off, only elements near the active depth can be located. This concept applies only to 3D files.
boresite lock
Glossary
B
buttons Areas in dialog boxes that you click to start, save, or dismiss an operation.
C
CALS The United States Department of Defense Computer-aided Acquisition and Logistic Support initiative, which was created to integrate and standardize all digital data received from Department of Defense suppliers. MicroStation supports CALS compliance by providing corresponding settings files. Like the function of an actual camera, the camera in MicroStation defines the portion of the design that is displayed when using perspective projection. The camera can be positioned and oriented in any manner required. Various lenses are available to modify the resulting image. When using the view camera, the position from which the model is viewed. When using the view camera, the settings you adjust to control projection. Any view in which the camera is on (perspective projection is active). The arrangement of stacked views of windows or views in numerical order, with the lowest numbered view entirely visible and the title bars of all other views visible. An architectural term for a wall that is not solid. A complex element composed of a group of primitive or other complex elements that is stored in a cell library for repeated placement. The graphical elements that make up a cell. A file that is used to store cells. To access cells in a cell library, the library must be attached to the active DGN file, except if the Cell Selector dialog box is used. The point, specified during cell creation, about which the cell is placed (the origin corresponds to the data point when the cell is placed in the design). Computer Graphics Metafile, which is an ANSI standard for the exchange of picture data between different graphics software that is device- and environment-independent. To cut a line across two linear elements, connecting the elements and modifying either one or both of the original elements. A square box in a dialog or setting box that can be clicked to toggle the associated setting. An element attribute, usually primary or construction.
camera
camera position camera settings camera view cascade
cavity wall cell cell definition cell library cell origin CGM
chamfer check box class
Glossary
C
click clip clipping boundary clip mask To press or tap once on a cursor or mouse button; to press a push button or check button in a dialog box. To divide an area, elements, or portions of elements in a design from the rest for manipulation or display. A boundary (established with a fence or from a named view) that separates the part of a reference that is displayed from the part that is hidden. Used with the Raster Manager or Reference tools, a clip mask allows you lets you clip out a portion of the image. Masking can be used, for example, to clear an area for text display. A plane that defines the front or back of the view cube, the portion of a 3D design displayed in a view. Elements that completely enclose the area within their boundaries. A complex curve that starts and ends at the same point, and encloses an area. Attaching a reference by aligning the coordinates of its design plane with those of the active DGN file, without any rotation, scaling, or offset. A coincidentally attached reference has a one-to-one correspondence between its design plane and the design plane of the active DGN file. If the working units settings and global origin are identical in the two files, the coordinates in working units are identical as well. An attribute that, when applied to a closed element, indicates the elements enclosed area as a solid shape of color. In a DGN file, the color table determines the correspondence between the 256-color attribute values and display colors. It is displayed in a dialog box. In a database table or file, a column or field represents the properties of objects (which are represented by records or rows.) An instruction that tells MicroStation what to do. Commands are activated with tools in tool boxes, pull down menus, settings and dialog boxes, key-ins, and function keys. All commands can be activated with a key-in. The button on a mouse or digitizing tablet cursor (puck) that is pressed to select a menu block in a paper menu. A text file containing an SQL statement. Paper mounted on the surface of a digitizing menu with blocks of varying sizes and shapes.
clipping plane closed closed B-Spline coincidentally coincident reference attachment
color fill color table column command
command button command file command menu
Glossary
C
compass complex chain complex element complex shape components cone A square or circle used to indicate the AccuDraw drawing plane origin, axes, and coordinate system. Color-coded hash marks indicate the positive X and Y axes. An open complex element that is formed from a series of open elements, such as lines, line strings, and arcs. An element created by combining several primitive elements. A closed complex element formed from a series of open primitive elements. Groups of settings that comprise drawing settings group. Component types are: linear, text, cell, point, area pattern, hatching, dimension, and multi-line. An element composed of two circles on parallel planes with a surface connecting the two circles. A cone can be a solid (capped on both ends) or surface (not capped) element. Equivalence strings that define where MicroStation is to look for certain files or classes of files. Configuration variables are tools for customizing your MicroStation working environment. For example, MicroStation knows to search for references in the directory (or semicolon-separated list of directories) specified in the configuration variable MS_RFDIR. A memory and time-efficient method of shading a rendered image by using only one color per polygon. The color of each polygon is calculated only once from the surface configuration and lighting source, producing a tiled effect in the final image. A type of element that is placed as a guideline from which to compose actual elements comprising a design. See active class. A rectangular array of vertices that, together with the B-spline order, define the shape of a B-spline surface. A polygon whose vertices, together with the B-spline order, define the shape of a B-spline curve. A special table in each database to which linkages are established, also known as MSCATALOG. Parts of a dialog box such as text fields, check boxes, and option menus. Location of a point in the design plane along the X (horizontal), Y (vertical), and Z (depth [3D only]) axes relative to the global origin.
configuration variables
constant shading
construction construction element control net control polygon control table controls coordinate
Glossary
C
coordinate readout cross-section crosshair Format and precision with which coordinate, measurement, and angle data is displayed in the status bar and in settings and dialog boxes. A view of the interior of an object as it is sliced along a plane. The crosshair located on the digitizing tablet cursor is used as the positioning target to select a menu block from a paper menu. The crosshair pointer on the screen is used with element placement tools. The process of constructing two sets of evenly spaced lines in a closed area bounded by a complex shape, closed element, or fence at the active pattern angles and spacing. Comma-separated values file: The CSV file format is an interchange format for tabular data, such as the contents of a flat file database or a table in a relational database. In this text file format, the first line contains the database field (column) names separated by commas. Each successive line corresponds to a database record (row). On each such line, the subject records field values are separated by commas. Hand-held tablet cursor. Commonly called a puck. A set of actions assigned to buttons on a tablet cursor. A cone element in which the circles that define each end have the same radius. Auxiliary coordinate system in which positions are described by two magnitudes (R and Z) and an angle.
crosshatch
CSV file
cursor cursor button menu cylinder cylindrical ACS
D
data button The button on a mouse or digitizing tablet that is pressed to enter data points, identify elements for manipulation, accept a previous action, select tools, and operate dialog box controls. Input entered using the pointing device that designates a point in the design. See relational database, non-graphical database. Information stored in a database manager and linked to a particular element in a DGN file. Where associated data is stored in a separate relational database that is linked to elements in the DGN file. A relationship that allows data to be transferred between an element and a database table.
data point database database attributes database interface database linkage
Glossary
D
database server default font degrees of freedom delay unit A software program that handles database functions and runs in parallel with MicroStation. The font used to display a text element in the design when the font with which the element was placed is not found. Freedom to vary placement of constraints from the model. A period of waiting time inserted into plotter output to accommodate output devices that cannot properly handle communications using baud rates of 9600 or higher. To remove an element(s) from the DGN file. A cell in a design that is derived from a dimension-driven cell. The space in which elements are created in a 3D design. The default MicroStationworkmode in which the full functionality of the application is enabled. MicroStation document file that contains one or more models. These models may be design models or sheet models. A working collection of references used in the performance of particular engineering tasks. Design compositions are used by engineers and other technical professionals to communicate through the visual content of their designs. The construction geometry and the constraints that make up a complete design. The historical record of changes to the DGN file. Enables you to restore earlier revisions of a DGN file. When you create a revision, Design History captures the state of the DGN file at that moment. A model is a container for elements. Models can be either 2D or 3D, but they are most useful in their 3D form. It may be helpful to think of a DGN file as a stack of cards, with each card being a model. Every model has its own set of eight views. The model whose views are displayed or available for display at a given time is the active model. The area in which elements are created in a 2D design. The period during which a DGN file is active. A view that can be designated for attaching saved attributes and displays from a source view. A window displayed on the screen that presents various controls that can be manipulated to set values that MicroStation will use.
delete derived cell design cube DGN workmode DGN file design composition
design geometry design history
design model
design plane design session destination view dialog box
Glossary
D
digital certificate digital rights digital signatures digitizing digitizing partition DGN files can be protected by certificates. Users can be granted access to that certificate and all the rights to the file associated with certificate. The type of rights (i.e. view, edit , export, etc.) to a protected file assigned to a user. The mechanism for indicating ones approval of DGN files to other users and communicating approval in a verifiable manner. The process of coding graphic information from paper sources (such as a map or other drawing) into a DGN file using a tablet. The area of a digitizing tablet in which the tablet cursor controls the screen pointer only within the part of the design in which features of the hard copy are being mapped. See partition, screen partition. A label in a design owing a linear, angular, or radial distance or angle measurement. The settings for all components of dimension elements, including text (color, weight, font, height, and width), lines (color, style, weight, and alternates), and level. A cell that can be placed throughout a design and adjusts dynamically to reflect relationships defined at its creation. An element that contains all of the lines, arcs, terminators, and text in a dimension. Symbols placed at the end of dimension lines that clarify the meaning of the dimensions. The line component of a dimension that is usually parallel to and the same length as the object being dimensioned. Symbols placed with dimension text that clarify the meaning of the dimension text. The constraints that define the exact dimensions of a construction. In a 3D design, the volume of the design that appears in a view. Collectively, the front and back of the view cube. Determines whether the contents of a view are continuously rendered and, if so, the type of rendering. A tool that allows automatic text annotation of drawings. Attributes are stored in an underlying database, and are inserted into text nodes in the drawing which serve as placeholders.
dimension dimension attributes
dimension driven cell dimension element dimension line terminators dimension line dimension mark dimensional constraints display cube display depth display mode displayable attribute
Glossary
D
displayable attribute table displayable attribute text node distant light dithering double-click drawing composition Specifies the display format for each type of displayable attribute text node. You can place a copy of some or all of an elements database attributes as text in the DGN file in a displayable attribute text node. Selected attributes are loaded into the displayable attribute text node based on an SQL SELECT statement. A type of light cell that casts light in a single direction. The process of alternating two or more colors pixel by pixel across the screen to seemingly create a third color not available in the color palette. To press or tap twice in quick succession on a cursor button or mouse button, or to press on a list box item in a dialog box twice in quick succession. A method in which views of the model are attached to a sheet model as references. Sheet files with attached references can also be established independent of the design model file so that a wider range of individuals may access these files. The plane on which data points are previewed with AccuDraw. In 3D, all data points will lie on this plane unless supplied by tentative point snap or by precision input key-in. The coordinate system (Rectangular or Polar) that defines the orientation of the drawing plane. The origin of the drawing plane coordinate system. To return the primitive elements composing a complex element to their primitive element status. A drawing exchange file format supported by most CAD packages. MicroStation reads and writes DXF files. A DXF file, when opened and subsequently modified in MicroStation is automatically saved as DXF. AutoCAD binary files that may be directly opened in MicroStation. The MicroStation workmode in which certain functionality is disabled by default in order to restrict MicroStation to creating only engineering data that can be stored in DWG format. DWG workmode is enabled by default when a DWG file is opened. A temporary representation, which moves when the pointer moves, that MicroStation displays until the placement is complete. The display of elements being drawn or modifications being made, which moves as the pointer moves, before the element or modification is entered into the design.
drawing plane
drawing plane coordinate system drawing plane origin drop complex element DXF
DWG files DWG workmode
dynamic display dynamic update
Glossary
E
edges hidden line removal element element attributes element manipulation element placement element symbology element tag Creates a DGN file where the lines hidden by surfaces (in the view the edges file was generated from) are removed. One of the entities that make up a DGN file. See graphic element. Color, line style, line weight, class, level, and fill. Other element attributes apply only to certain element types. To delete, copy, move, rotate, mirror, or scale existing graphic elements in the design. Tools used to place or construct graphic elements in the design. The color, line style, and line weight of an element. Where associated data is stored in the DGN file with the graphical elements. Tags allow you to associate non-graphical data to elements in the DGN file if the data is relatively simple or if you must maintain compatibility with other CAD packages that store data inside their drawing files. The associated tag data may be copied from the tag, loaded into a database and linked back to the tag. One or more placeholders representing characters that reserve space in a text element for future input. The character used during text entry to designate a character position in an enter data field. The fundamental unit of data in a DWG, DXF, IGES, or CGM file. In general, entities are the equivalent of MicroStation elements. A suffix of characters optionally separated from the main part of a filename by a period (.) character. Traditionally, these have been used to designate the type of the file. For example, .dgn is commonly used to represent a DGN file. Component of dimensions that consists of lines extending from the dimensioned points to the dimension line.
enter data field enter data field special character entity extension
extension lines
F
fast display A view attribute setting in which the display changes to an abbreviated form of the information which would normally be displayed. The nature of the information in the design does not change; only the presentation of it in the view changes. Fast display can be selected for cells, curves, text, and fonts. A part of a solids model created using feature modeling tools. Indicators of geometric tolerancing in a design.
feature feature control frames
Glossary
F
feature modeling fence fence contents A technique for creating models with parametric-based solids using tools designed for this purpose. A polygonal boundary that designates multiple elements for simultaneous manipulation using fence tools. The elements and portions of elements operated on by fence tools determined by the fence selection mode. These elements can be enclosed by, outside of, or overlap the fence. A criterion (SQL SELECT statement) based on non-graphical data associated with elements that can be used to restrict the elements that are selected for fence operations. Tools that operate on the fence contents. A setting that determines the fence contents. In a dialog box, an area into which a filename or other keyboard input can be entered. In a non-graphical database, a column. Denotes the string used when calling for a generic file. Element that is colored within the planar element boundaries, as opposed to being displayed as just an outline. A rendering method that generates a surface model in which each visible surface is filled with the element color. An arc constructed between and tangent to two converging lines. A filename pattern that limits filenames displayed in a list to those fitting the pattern. For example, *.dgn. A viewing operation that expands the area seen within a view to include all elements on all levels turned on in the view. View that shows all elements on the levels turned on in the view. A bitmapped image (raster element) with or without an associated explanatory message used for annotating a design with reminders or suggestions for future changes. A light source located at the camera position which illuminates any visible object. A dialog box, tool box, or other part of MicroStations graphical user interface that can be positioned freely on screen.
fence filter
fence manipulation fence selection mode field filename filled filled hidden line fillet filter fit fitted view flag
flashbulb floating
Glossary
F
fog folding font font library function keys function key menu A type of atmospheric cueing in which the shaded images are faded to the fog color as their distance from the eye increases. The process of attaching a view about an orthogonal axis of a line defined by two data points. A style of lettering. Fonts are identified by both a number and a font name. A file that contains fonts for use by MicroStation or other applications. These fonts may include TTF and SHX formats. Application keys that are programmable; located at the top of the keyboard. A way to assign actions to the function keys on the keyboard.
G
geometric tolerancing geometry global origin Specification of how much a manufactured object can deviate from the geometry shown in a design. Type of entity that defines physical shapes, including points, curves, surfaces, solids, and relations (collections of similarly structured entities). Location of the origin of the Cartesian coordinate system in design plane coordinates. When design plane positions are specified or reported in working units, they are relative to the global origin. See smooth shading. A type of cell in which the symbology (color, line style, and line weight) is determined when it is created. A graphic component of the design. Referred to in user documentation as simply an element. A permanent grouping of elements (primitive or complex). An element can be a member of only one graphic group at a time. The setting that, when on, causes all elements in a graphic group to be manipulated whenever one member of the graphic group is manipulated. For example, if an element in a graphic group is deleted with Graphic Group Lock on, all elements in the graphic group are likewise deleted. The setting that, when on, forces all graphically entered data points to the grid point nearest to the specified point.
Gouraud shading graphic graphic element graphic group graphic group lock
grid lock
Glossary
G
grid A matrix of grid points (dots) and grid references (crosses) at user-defined intervals, used as a visual aid or in conjunction with the Grid Lock setting for precision input. Evenly spaced points in the design plane located at integer multiples of the grid units from the global origin. Reference crosses spaced at user-defined intervals on the grid. The settings that specify the distance between adjacent grid points and the number of grid points between grid references. A complex element (actually an unnamed cell) that is not defined in a cell library. Groups can be created to keep elements together, or to be copied for repeated placement in a design.
grid points grid references grid units group
H
handles hatch help articles help topics hidden line hidden line removal highlight color hole elements hypertext Small squares drawn on (or sometimes near) elements to indicate that they have been selected. This provides an alternative to highlighting. The process of constructing a set of evenly spaced lines in a closed area. Text that displays in the Help window to explain particular concepts, features, and procedures in MicroStation. A list of the areas covered by help articles that displays in the Help window. A rendering method that generates a surface model. See filled hidden line. The process of removing the lines in a 3D design that are hidden by surfaces. See edges hidden line removal. The color in which an element is displayed upon identification for manipulation. Elements whose area attribute is set to hole, as opposed to solid. The text that appears in color in the online help and allows you to jump from topic to topic by selecting it.
I
identify IGDS To enter a data point on an element to distinguish it for manipulation or modification. Interactive Graphics Design Software, the software that ran on Intergraph VAX-based CAD systems.
Glossary
I
IGES Initial Graphics Exchange Specification, a public domain, ANSI standard, neutral file format that is intended as an international standard for the exchange of product definition data between different CAD/CAM systems. The settings or dialog box control upon which the next keystroke will act has the input focus. If on, new characters are inserted at the insertion point. The point, represented by a vertical bar, at which new characters are inserted. Elements completely enclosed in a fence are inside the fence. An occurrence of a shared cell that is placed in a design. The standard view that shows top, left, and front facets of a design. The setting that, when turned on, forces each data point to lie on the isometric drawing plane. Standard view in a 3D design where the top, left, and front faces of a cube drawn orthogonal to the design cube axes are equally inclined to the screen surface. In a dialog box, any control such as a text field, check box, or option menu.
input focus insert mode insertion point inside instance isometric isometric lock Isometric (Iso) view item
J
joints Intersections of multi-lines.
K
key-in Key-in window keypoint keypoint snap mode An instruction entered into the Key-in window to control MicroStation. Most key-ins have GUI control equivalents. A window used to scroll through lists of key-ins, construct key-ins, and submit key-ins to MicroStation. Opens when Key-in is chosen from the Utilities menu. Points on an element to which a tentative point will snap when Snap Lock is on activated within Keypoint mode. If active, entering a tentative point close enough to an element causes the tentative point to snap to a keypoint on the element.
Glossary
L
level In the MicroStation DGN file format, the number of levels is unlimited, and the minimum number of levels is 1. You can delete unused levels. All levels are named and have default colors, line weights, and line styles, providing the foundation for numerous enhancements. An important benefit of the level system is the ability to standardize level structures across DGN files. Filtering the level entries in the list boxes in the Level Display and Level Manager dialog boxes allows you to search and sort these entries. A set of levels that can be collectively manipulated and displayed. The setting that, when turned on, prevents selection or manipulation of any element that is not on the active level. The hierarchical organization of levels after they are grouped. A view setting that, when turned on, causes all elements on a particular level to be displayed with the same element symbology. See cell library. A cell containing a light source. A point in a design that is not visible, but casts light that is visible in a shaded view. An open graphic element composed of line segments connected at the vertices. A part of the symbology of an element, for example, whether a line is solid, continuous dashes, dots and dashes, and so on. Each element can have its own line style or each can be defined by separate symbology. You can create custom line styles. Any of the properties such as stroke patterns, point symbols, and compound components that apply to a line style. A line style name and its corresponding line style components stored in a line style library. Properties that can be applied to a line style to modify it as elements are placed, without requiring separate line style definitions. A cell placed at the end of an open element, oriented in the direction of the element. A commonly used line terminator is an arrowhead placed at the end of a line segment. An index in the range 0 to 31 that designates the weight or thickness of the lines used to draw or plot a graphic element. Each element has its own line weight.
level filter level group level lock level structure level symbology library light cell light source line string line style
line style component line style definition line style modifiers line terminator
line weight
Glossary
L
linear patterning linkage mode The repetitive placement of the active pattern cell along a line, line string, shape, arc, circle, ellipse, or curve element. The setting that determines how the active entity is treated when a graphic element is linked to it. Settings include new (unique row required for each linkage), duplicate (same row used for each linkage), information (no table rows added or deleted when linked element is copied or deleted), and none (no linkages can be created). Rectangular areas in which files, directories, or other items are listed for selection or reference. To find an element in the DGN file. A setting that determines the size of the area surrounding the element selection or identification pointer in which MicroStation can locate elements. Settings that you selectively enable or disable. Locks affect the way MicroStation interprets and reacts to your input.
list box locate locate tolerance locks
M
macro macro language manipulate mark mask master units material assignment table material characteristics material definition material palette A software program that automates an often-used, usually short sequence of operations. Used to represent macro code a dialect of BASIC with MicroStation-specific extensions. To copy, move, rotate, scale, mirror, or delete an element or group of elements. See dimension mark. An area of a reference that is not displayed. The largest units in common use in a model. Assigns a material to elements on a level(s) with a color(s) in the design. Information for mapping color indices and levels to surface characteristics, such as reflectivity, finish, and color. The attributes related to color, texture, transparency, and finish that may be applied to surfaces. Contains material definitions including pattern maps, bump maps, or combinations of both.
Glossary
M
material tables Files that contain material characteristics. With material tables, simple textures or materials such as flatmetal or plastic can be simulated as part of a final rendering. Paper (mounted on the surface of a digitizing tablet) menus that contain menu blocks of a fixed size organized in rows and columns. When a dialog box or window is drawn to the largest scale that will fit on the selected paper size. Dimensions that conform to mechanical design conventions. One method for activating a MicroStation command, including pull-down menus, tool boxes, function key menus, and paper menus. An area in a paper (command or matrix) menu defining a region that is selected to perform specific task. A cell in a cell library that contains the special information needed for a paper menu. Information specified with user commands that controls how menu actions are taken when menu options are selected. A MicroStation DGN file in which menu cells are created for custom menus. Any of the list of options on a pull-down menu. Allows programmers to execute C language code within MicroStation.
matrix menus maximized mechanical dimension format menu menu block menu cell menu control information menu DGN file menu item MicroStation Development Language (MDL) mirror mnemonic access character model
A manipulation that reverses the geometry of graphic elements about a horizontal, vertical, or specified arbitrary line. The underlined character in each menu name and menu item. A DGN file component that contain elements. Design models can be either 2D or 3D, but they are most useful in their 3D form. Sheet models, which are flat and used for drawing composition, are ordinarily 2D. By default, the view windows of a design model have black backgrounds, and the view windows of a sheet model have white backgrounds. The Ctrl, Alt, and Shift keys, which may be used in conjunction with the function keys to create new function key definitions.
modifier key
Glossary
M
module monument point MSCATALOG A subdirectory tree under MicroStations directory that contains data files in the sample workspaces. A known landmark point in the design plane. Monument points are used to orient references. A table that must be contained in every non-graphical database with linkages to elements. MSCATALOG contains information associated with each table that is used by the database server. A list of snap modes applied sequentially. You can define three multi-snaps. A set of two or more parallel lines treated as a single object, commonly used for drawing walls in floor plans. A multi-line element can be defined to include up to 16 separate lines, each with its own symbology, level, and class.
multi-snap multi-line element
N
nested nested reference attachments When part of a cell is used as part of an additional cell. MicroStation provides live nested reference attachments as an alternative to flattening all reference attachments in the active model. When this option is enabled, changes to reference attachments in designs that are referenced to other designs are reflected the next time either the active models views are updated or the file is reopened. Shorthand for text node. Also a computer in a network. A non-coincidentally attached reference is offset, rotated, or scaled from the active DGN file. A collection of tables representing objects that, unlike DGN file elements, are not conveniently represented in pictorial form. A manner of operating MicroStation; to select an element in the design before selecting a tool to act upon it. Non-Uniform Rational B-splines.
node non-coincidental reference attachment non-graphic database noun-verb NURBs
O
offset opaque open B-spline In a compound line style component, the value that specifies the distance measured perpendicularly from the working line to where the component is displayed. A type of fill that is displayed as a solid shape of the active color. A B-spline that starts at its first pole and ends at its last pole; its ends do not meet.
Glossary
O
option menu Oracle linkage order A menu in a dialog box that allows only one value to be selected. See database linkage. Integer value associated with a B-spline that determines the smoothness of the B-spline and the number of points in the control polygon, influencing the path of the curve at a given position. The higher the order, the smoother the curve, and the more points in the control polygon influencing the path of the curve. See cell origin or global origin. Linkages without associated rows in the database. Constructed with right angles or perpendicular lines. An orthogonal shape contains only right angles. A type of fill that displays lines in the active color forming a wireframe view of the closed element. A fence selection mode that includes only the elements inside or overlapping the fence. The mode that allows you to override the Snap Mode. The mode of text entry in which each new character overwrites an existing character.
origin orphan linkage orthogonal outline overlap override overwrite mode
P
PDF panning paper menus parabola parallel projection parameter particle tracing partition Adobes Portable Document format. Files of this format are often referred to as PDFs. To scroll a view over the design plane. Menus printed on paper and mounted on the surface of a digitizing tablet. The Command button on the tablet cursor is used to select an item on a paper menu. A plane curve generated by a point moving so that its distance from a fixed point is equal to its distance from a fixed line. A view of a 3D design in which each element is projected to the screen along a line parallel to the Z-axis of the view. (Compare perspective projection.) See settings. Provides photo-realistic lighting solutions. An alternative to traditional radiosity solving, it has significantly lower memory requirements. To separate the digitizing tablet into two regions.
Glossary
P
path configuration variable pattern element patterning perspective projection A type of configuration variable that tells MicroStation in which directories to find files, MS_DEF, for example. An element with a class attribute of pattern. It can be placed only with a patterning tool. See area patterning. View of a 3D design in which each element is projected to the screen along a line that intersects with the eyepoint. Elements that are further from the front of the view thus appear smaller. (Compare parallel projection.) A method of shading a rendered image that recalculates the color for each pixel in the final image. Phong shading produces high quality images but increases rendering time. In file exchange, the graphical information that draws a picture. PICture ELement, the smallest dot of light that a monitor can display. The tool used to place a line, line string, shape, arc, or circle or a combination thereof. The file generated by MicroStation that contains plotter commands that, when sent to an output device, will cause it to print out the desired portion of the design plane. A file containing information needed to generate plotfiles for a particular type of output device. These file have the form *.PLT. See data point, tentative point, or active point. A cell with a single, snappable point. Point cells are commonly used for symbols and to establish monument points. The snappable point in a point cell is the cell origin. Point cells are always placed relative to the active level with the active symbology. A type of curve that has no settings that control the curves shape. A special case of a line element that has no length. A type of light cell that radiates light in all directions from a single location. Light emanating from a point. Point light sources illuminate surfaces differently depending on their orientation. The point at which two non-parallel lines intersect, or would intersect if the lines were extended.
Phong shading
picture data pixel Place SmartLine plotfile
plotter driver file point point cell
point curve point element point light point light source point of intersection
Glossary
P
point symbols pointer pointers polar array polar coordinates pole polygon hidden line PopSet A type of line style component. The small icon on the screen that moves in response to user inputs and indicates the position where input is supplied to MicroStation. Variables used by MicroStation and other applications to place, locate, and process elements in the DGN file. The set of copies of an element placed in a circular pattern in a design. The coordinates used in a spherical (auxiliary) coordinate system or in AccuDraw to specify distances and angles. A vertex of a B-spline curve. A type of rendering performed by MicroStation. A feature that prevents the display of the selected tools settings window when you are finished adjusting its controls. PopSet allows you to reclaim valuable screen real estate and reduce pointer movement. A tool that simplifies the process of defining attribute-based element selection criteria. A means of entering data points at precise locations either by specifying the coordinates or by specifying the distance from the most recent data point or tentative point. Settings that customize MicroStation to your particular machine and desired mode of operation. Elements whose class attribute is primary (as opposed to construction.) The MSLINK column in a database with linkages. Any row can be uniquely specified solely by its MSLINK column value. The simplest type of element. An encryption/decryption key known only to the parties exchanging messages. In file exchange, graphical information that describes a design. A planar cross-section of an actual element that can be projected or rotated to draw the final element. A type of configuration variable file that is set by a site or project manager to facilitate using MicroStation in workgroups. A project can also be the component workspaces and the data files used for a particular discipline or undertaking.
PowerSelector precision input key-ins
preferences primary elements primary key primitive elements private key product-definition data profile element project
Glossary
P
projection A type of action that may be taken on a planar profile element formed by extruding a line string, curve, shape, ellipse, complex chain, or complex shape to create a surface of projection. Text file used to provide the header for a PostScript file. The text in the status bar that tells you what to do next. Element criteria that may be searched, including the area attribute (Solid or Hole), whether an element can be snapped to, whether it is locked, and whether it has been modified. With a private key derived from the public key you can effectively encrypt messages with a digital signature.
prolog prompt properties
public key
R
raster background raster fonts receiving application record rectangular ACS reference A bitmapped picture that can be used as the backdrop for a rendering. Fonts used to display text in the status bar, dialog boxes, tool boxes, and each view windows title bar. In file exchange, the application into which a file exported from MicroStation will be imported. The equivalent of a row in a database table, representing an individual object. An auxiliary coordinate system that uses standard (Cartesian) axes. A model attached to and displayed with the active model for printing or construction purposes. A reference cannot be modified. You can attach, as a reference, a model that resides in either the open DGN file or some other DGN file. A software package that stores, manipulates, and reports on non-graphical information. It acts on collections of tables or files that represent objects, their properties, and relationships between the objects. To produce an image of a 3D model that looks more realistic than a wireframe image. Includes hidden line and surface shading. Text files that report output from MicroStation. A file containing the database attributes of elements in a fenced area. A report table is structured identically to the master table from which the data was derived. A placement action that, with most tools, backs up one step. In some cases a Reset operation completes an action; in other cases, it cancels an action or rejects an identified element.
relational database
rendering report files report table reset
Glossary
R
reset button resetting resize border The button on a mouse or digitizing table cursor that is pressed to enter a Reset. Entering a Reset. The frame around each view that permits the view to be resized. When the pointer is placed on the resize border, it becomes a double arrow, and that border can be pulled or pushed to expand or contract the size of the view. The number of addressable points across a given area. For example, output device resolution is measured in lines per inch, while screen resolution is usually given with two numbers indicating the number of pixels across the width and height of the largest image that can be displayed. The default specifications for menus and dialog boxes. File containing the default specifications for dialog boxes. A specific version of a saved DGN file. With each file save operation, Design History captures the state of the DGN file at that moment by recording your user ID, the current time and date, the incremental changes to the elements in the design, and optional comments. A type of action that may be taken on a planar profile element formed by rotating a line string, curve, shape, ellipse, B-spline curve, complex chain, or complex shape. The view showing the top, right and front faces of a cube. See record. See dynamic update.
resolution
resource resource file revision
revolution right isometric row rubberbanding
S
saved saved view scale The kinds of settings, such as working units and view configuration, that are kept between sessions. A named view definition saved in a DGN file for later recall or for attaching to another model file as a reference. To resize an element or elements by the active scale factors. In plotting, the ratio between distance in the DGN file master units and distance represented on the output device. One of the pieces that make up MicroStations graphical user interface, such as the desktop, a window border, or a button. Pull-down menus, tool frames, dialog boxes, and sidebar menus.
screen element screen menus
Glossary
S
screen partition search criteria section seed DGN file seed sheet model select select range select settings window selection set sending application separator bar server model settings settings file The area of a digitizing tablet in which the tablet cursor controls the screen pointer normally across the entire screen. See partition, compare to digitizing partition. Element attributes for which MicroStation can search. Part of a drawing that shows interior detail that is too complex to see clearly in a wireframe view. A template file that contains the appropriate default settings and attributes. A seed file from which sheet models can be created. To distinguish an element, identify a list box entry on which to operate, or activate a tool or view control. See locate tolerance. Used to adjust the active settings and select a drawing tool. A group of selected elements. Selected elements are displayed with handles. In file exchange, application that created a file that is to be imported into MicroStation. A horizontal line across a menu that logically subdivides menu items in the same menu. Defines the interaction between MicroStation, a database package, and the database server. Values that determine how MicroStation displays a design or handles user input. An import or export file that stores all settings for a particular conversion as they were when the settings file was created or last saved. Also, a type of module data (.stg files) that specifies active settings and drawing tool selections; used with the Select Settings window. A file containing an image created in the first step in rendering shadows, used to determine whether surfaces are illuminated or in shadow. A closed primitive element composed of linear segments. A cell whose elements are stored only once in the DGN file, regardless of how often the cell is placed. Any change made to one instance of a shared cell reflects in all instances of that shared cell. The elements comprising the shared cell. A 3D DGN file in which views of the model file(s), including visible edges and sections, are attached.
shadow map shape shared cell
shared cell Definition sheet file
Glossary
S
sheet model A type of model that serves as an electronic drawing sheet. It typically consists of design model references that are scaled and positioned to create a printable drawing. A menu that displays onscreen and presents commands for selection in a text-based, hierarchical form. Although sidebar menus are still supported, tool boxes have taken their place. Selecting a tool for one-time use by double-clicking it. To put a window just below the lowest view. A type of configuration variable set by a system or site manager to facilitate using MicroStation in workgroups. Not a light in the traditional sense, but acts as a control when using Solar, Distant and Sky lights. A sky opening generates more efficient solutions for indoor scenes lit with sky or sun light through an opening such as a skylight, window, or door. Processing time is reduced because testing for shadows is carried out in the directions of the sky openings, as opposed to testing the entire sky. A volume of projection with a rectangular cross section. See Place SmartLine. A method of shading a rendered image by calculating the color of the polygons at their boundaries and blending those colors across the polygon interiors. The setting that, when on, causes MicroStation to try to find an element or element intersection to snap to when a tentative point is entered. See also keypoint snap mode. The setting that determines the positioning of keypoints on linear segments. The number of keypoints per segment is one greater than the snap divisor. If the snap divisor is one, only endpoints of a linear segment are keypoints. If the snap divisor is two or a multiple of two, the center point is also a keypoint. Use of the tentative point to position a data point at an exact point on the target element. Tentative points snap to an element when Snap Lock is on. The number of keypoints on each segment of a linear element plus one. Lighting that approximates illumination from the sun. MicroStation allows solar light to be approximated at any time of day between sunrise and sunset, on any date, and at any latitude.
sidebar menu
single-shot sink site sky opening
slab SmartLine smooth shading snap lock
snap divisor
snap snap lock divisor solar light
Glossary
S
solar time stamp You can display the current solar time and date information while rendering a view. This lets you produce solar studies, for example, in which the time and date appear. A special cell, SLRTIM, contains enter data fields into which you can place variables that are replaced with the required information which then appears during rendering. A type of complex element specific to 3D, along with surfaces. A solid formed by moving a closed planar shape along a linear trajectory to a second parallel plane. The shape at the target plane is rotated by the active Angle and scaled by the active Scale. The profile elements are connected at their keypoints by linear rule elements. A solid formed by sweeping a closed planar element around an axis of revolution. The profile elements are connected at their keypoints by circular arc rule elements. A view created, set up, and saved to use as a model view. Auxiliary coordinate system in which positions are determined by one magnitude and two angles. A type of light cell that casts a conical beam of light. Standard Query Language, a simple, powerful language that is the industry standard for database access and data manipulation. A group of dimensions that have at least one witness line in common. The eight commonly used views of a 3D design (Isometric, Right Isometric, Top, Bottom, Left, Right, Front, and Back). The MDL application that is active when a DGN file is not opened. The strip at the bottom of the application window (or screen) that displays messages, prompts, and status information. The area on the screen where messages such as tool prompts, errors, and the current status of MicroStation settings (snaps, levels, element selection, and DGN file disk status) are displayed. Human vision uses the difference between the image seen by the left and right eyes to perceive distance. MicroStation can duplicate this effect by rendering two different images from slightly differing camera positions, and then superimposing the two images on one screen in different colors. When the composite image is viewed with 3D glasses, it appears to have depth. A setting that causes a sampled stream point to be saved if the angle formed by the sampled point and the two most recently sampled points exceeds the setting.
solid solid of projection
solid of revolution source view spherical ACS spot light SQL stacked dimensions standard views startup application status bar
stereo imagery
stream angle
Glossary
S
stream area A setting that causes a sampled stream point to be saved if the area of a triangle formed from the sampled stream point and the two most recently saved points exceeds the setting. A setting that determines when the pointer position is a sampled point. If the distance from the previous sampled point to the current pointer position is greater than the stream delta, the point is considered a sampled point and the stream angle, stream area, and stream tolerance settings are tested to see if the point should be recorded as a data point. A setting that causes a sampled stream point to be saved if the distance from the sampled stream point to the most recently saved point exceeds the setting. A line style component comprising dash strokes and gap strokes. The setting that determines the size of polygons into which curved surfaces are broken for rendering. A multi-line definition or set of dimension attributes that can be saved in a settings file for later recall. Units that master units are divided into in the working unit definition. For example, if master units are feet, a convenient subunits setting would be inches. The number of subunits per master unit and a one or two character abbreviation for the subunit name is specified in the working unit definition. See extension. A 3D geometric construction that can partition space but cannot enclose a volume. A relationship between an element color and a surface color, reflectivity, and roughness. See also material tables. The file that contains surface descriptions for one or more element colors. The surface description file is used by MicroStations surface shading. A surface formed by moving a planar profile element along a linear trajectory to a second parallel plane. The profile at the target plane is rotated by the active Angle and scaled by the active Scale. The profile elements are connected at their keypoints by linear rule elements. A surface formed by sweeping a planar profile element about an axis of revolution. The profile elements are connected at their keypoints by circular arc rule elements. Process of creating a lifelike image where the visible surfaces are filled with colors calculated from their surface descriptions and the ambient and point light sources. A character placed from a MicroStation symbol font.
stream delta
stream tolerance stroke pattern stroke tolerance style subunits
suffix surface surface description surface description file surface of projection
surface of revolution surface shading symbol
Glossary
S
symbol font A font that contains special use geometric constructions rather than alphanumeric characters. A typical use is to hold symbols for dimension line terminators and dimension marks, and geometric tolerancing. MicroStation uses the term cell library to refer to what may be known as a symbol library in other applications. See element symbology, level symbology, or attributes. Type of configuration variable.
symbol library symbology system
T
tags tag set tag set definition tentative button tentative point Non-graphical attributes that may be attached to elements drawn in designs. Set of associated tags. Information that specifies, for each tag in a tag set, several tag attributes, such as whether the tag is displayed and its default value, if any. The button that is pressed to enter a tentative data point. The tentative button may also shift the location of the AccuSnap selection. A graphic input that is used to preview the location of the next data point, define a point of reference, and/or create an association point. Tentative points may appear with AccuSnap. A global data area of memory in which MicroStation stores settings. See dimension line terminators or line terminator. The color, weight, font, height, and width of text. MicroStation places text in DGN files as a distinct type of element. A group of multiple text elements grouped in a complex element. MicroStation automatically forms a text node when multi-line text is placed. A setting that, when turned on, forces subsequently entered text to be attached to empty text nodes. If an empty node is not available, no text is placed. Comprises a group of text attributes such as font type, width, height, and color. Text styles allow you to place text within a model file in a consistent and automated manner. The fonts that are supported natively in MicroStation are True Type and AutoCAD fonts (.shx)
Terminal Control Block (TCB) terminator text attributes text element text node text node lock text style
Glossary
T
3D data point A method of entering a data point in a 3D design by first shooting a boreline in one view, and then selecting a position along the boreline from another, non-parallel view. This combination of steps identifies a unique point in the design cube. A method of entering a tentative point in a 3D design by first shooting a boreline in one view, and then selecting a position along the boreline from another, non-parallel view. This combination of steps identifies a unique point in the design cube. To arrange views and tool boxes so that they do not overlap. A type of setting that has only two states, such as off and on. Used as a verb, to change the state of a toggle. A drawing function or the screen icon used to represent that function in a tool box. Icon-based screen menus from which tools and view controls are selected. A tool box that has child tool boxes. Special settings that apply to certain tools, such as length and angle settings for the Place Line tool. The window that contains controls for adjusting the selected tools settings. The orientation in which the positive X-axis points right and the positive Y-axis points up. An SQL procedure that loads a screen form with the correct information from the database when the user reviews attributes or loads displayable attributes.
3D tentative point
tile toggle tool tool box tool frame tool settings tool settings window top trigger
U
Unit Lock The setting that, when on, forces all graphically entered data points to the nearest point that is an integer multiple of the unit distance from the global origin in the X, Y, and (in 3D files) Z directions. The setting that specifies the spacing between points that data points will be restricted to when Unit Lock is turned on. A cell whose definition is placed in the DGN file each time the cell is placed. To redraw the contents of a view window(s). A type of configuration variable that determines which project configuration file is processed. The file that contains the active workspace components.
unit distance unshared cell update user user configuration file
Glossary
U
user interface user preference A customized user interfaced (defined in Modification resource files in subdirectories under MicroStations workspace user interface). See preferences.
V
V7 workmode The MicroStation workmode in which certain functionality is disabled by default in order to restrict MicroStation to creating only engineering data that can be stored in the MicroStation v7 (MicroStation/J) design file format. A manner of operating MicroStation: choosing a tool before identifying an element in the design for it to act upon. The highest point or apex of a figure, the intersection of lines or curves, or the endpoint of an element. Collectively, the portion of the active model (and its attached references) and displayed in a view window and the display orientation. For element placement, the axis relative to the view. The arrangement of view windows on the screen and the area of the model displayed in each view. The bar at the bottom border of each view window from which commonly used view controls can be selected. Graphically operated controls that affect the portion of the design or the orientation of the information in a view. The portion of the design cube in a view. The extent, in working units, of a view along its horizontal and vertical axes. Settings that affect the presentation of information in a view. A set of view window layouts applicable to a model within the open DGN file. A view group is also a set of views placed on a sheet file in a sheet model. A text element that displays at its angle of placement regardless of how the view is rotated. A dynamic that shows you what will be included in a view with perspective projection. The volume displayed in a 3D view. A window displaying a view.
verb-noun vertex view view axis view configuration view control bar view controls view cube view delta view dependent settings view group view independent text viewing pyramid view volume view window
Glossary
V
visible edge visible edges DGN file visible surface shading void void-clip A form of rendering in which the edges of surfaces are made visible. DGN file created using edges hidden line removal. See surface shading. A fence selection mode that selects elements or parts of elements outside the fence, rather than within the fence. A fence mode in which only the elements that are completely outside the fence and those parts of elements outside or overlapping the fence are included in the fence contents. A fence mode in which only the elements outside or overlapping the fence are included in the fence contents. See solid of projection. See solid of revolution.
void-overlap volume of projection volume of revolution
W
window window control menu window origin windowing wireframe wiremesh witness lines work line working set working units A bordered rectangular region on the screen displaying a tool box, dialog box, view, or sidebar menu. A menu opened by clicking the window menu button on the left end of a windows title bar. The position in the design plane of the lower-left corner of a view. A method of selecting new contents for a view. A display mode in which surfaces are displayed as their outlines, and elements behind surfaces are displayed as though the surfaces did not exist. A rendered display similar to wireframe except that curved surfaces are represented by a polygonal mesh for increased realism. See extension lines. The line in a multi-line element connected to the pointer during placement. A temporary grouping of elements that need not be close together. Fence manipulation tools operate on working sets. Real-world units that the design plane is configured to.
Glossary
W
working unit settings The settings that designate the working units and working resolution. In the current implementation, MicroStation uses IEEE 64bit floating point storage, which allows for a high degree of accuracy and a working volume with each axis roughly 2 million times larger than the axes in V7. An operating mode of MicroStation such as DGN, DWG, and V7 workmodes. A custom MicroStation environment or configuration.
workmode workspace
Z
zoom To decrease (zoom in) or increase (zoom out) the portion of the design displayed in a view.
Index
3D modeling features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 A Arrange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Audit dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 DWG file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 AutoCAD CTB plot style tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 import pen style table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 pen style tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 B BACKUP key-in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Batch operations merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619 standards checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Batch Print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Borderless tool icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624 Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Buttons reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 C Cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Cell libraries merge multiple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 Certificates enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Change Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 workmode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 Check standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Clip Mask view control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Clip Volume view control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Close DGN files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Colors Design History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Compress Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Compression options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Configuration variables in key-ins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 MS_BACKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Contents of online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 Coordinate Readout accuracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650 format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650 setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649 Copy View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .726 COPY VIEW key-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .726 Create DGN files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 613 Package wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 D Data button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637 Data points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Database linkages verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Delete elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .913 levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Design file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .728 Design files save as to create backup copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Design History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610 colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 commit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Design plane working resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 DGN files backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
MicroStation QuickStart Guide i1
Index
close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 compress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 143 create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 613 make backup copy of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 merge multiple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 save as to create backup copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 seed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728, 649 Digital Signatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Digitizing tablets menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Dimension Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Dimension settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Dimension styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Dimensioning tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Displaysets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Dock tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629 Drag and drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Drawing file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Drawings sheet models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 DWG files audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 filter save options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 open options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 reference save options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 references save options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 save options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 DXF files export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 E Edit light sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Edit menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 Undo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638 Undo Other > All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638 Element Selection for text editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Elements delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .916 selection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .917 undelete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .916 Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Encryption prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619, 921 EXIT key-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .921 Explode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Export DGN, DWG, DXF files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 F Feature Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 File menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Compress Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Exit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619, 921 New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 645 Open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 68 Save Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650 File protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Files compress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615 protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 145 recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Filters level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Fit design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .718 View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 718 FIT VIEW EXTENDED key-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .719 Fonts mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 G Gray scale pen definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Grips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Groups named. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
i2 MicroStation QuickStart Guide
Index
H Help browse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913, 659 contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .915 context-sensitive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .915 hypertext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .913 online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658 search for keyword. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .913 topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .913 tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913, 660 window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .915 HELP key-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 Help menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659 Hypertext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .913 I Icons borderless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624 Image editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Import AutoCAD plot style tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Initialize Design History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610 Input focus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 919 Installation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 K Key-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .919 Key-ins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640 edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643 recall previous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643 Keyboard focus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 L Levels delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 in references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 nested attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 symbology overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Licenses enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Light sources edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 Line strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Line weights display width. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .819 translation for display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .819 Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .916 Linkage database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Logical reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 M Magnify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .714 Match from cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 from pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Material Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Menu pop-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 MicroStation Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612 compress files with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615 copy files with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613 create DGN files with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613 delete file with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615 merge cell libraries with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 merge DGN files with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 rename file with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614 Models sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Modify Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 MOVE key-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .722 Multi-line styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Multi-snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 N Named groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 quickset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645 Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Index
O Object snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658 Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 DGN files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627 view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Oracle 9i. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 P Package create wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Pan View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .721 PAN VIEW key-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .722 Passwords enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Pattern change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Patterning Settings interior shapes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 search for holes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 PDF print to file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Pen input device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 screening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Pen Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Pick button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Place Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95, 1011 Line String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 note. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Place Note dimension styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 Place Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .912 Pop-up dialog boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Pop-up menus view control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .725 Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 817 categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 line weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .819 set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 set to default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .818 Print area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 114 batch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 raster options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 size/scale option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 to PDF file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Print driver pdf.plt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Protecting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Protection enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Q Quickset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Quit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 QUIT key-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .921 R Raster geolocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 manipulate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 reprojection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Raster Manager Modify Raster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Move Raster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Scale Raster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Record Design History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610 Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 Redraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 713 References attach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 attachment hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 thru 132 copy by folding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Index
highlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 level filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 reload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 slot numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Refresh view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .713 Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637 button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 637 Rotate View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .719 ROTATE VIEW EXTENDED key-in . . . . . . . . . . .720 S Save preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650 Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 68 Saved Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .730 attach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .731 description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .732 Scale at which model is displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 set for printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Screening pen definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Seed files design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .916 Set window area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .716 Settings menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 Settings menu Design File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728, 649 View Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .729 Sheet Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 SHX fonts font mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Slot numbers reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Snap Mode Multi-snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Standards Checker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 System requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 T Text edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 element selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Text Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Tool locate in tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632 locked selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 select in tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623 single-shot selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 Tool box float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627 Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623 open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627 select tool in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 View Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .725 Tool Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623 dock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629 undock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630 Tool settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633 window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633 True Type fonts font mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 U Undo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638 all operations in undo buffer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638 buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638 effect of compressing DGN file on . . . . . . . . . . .638 viewing operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .723 Update View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Update View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .713 UPDATE VIEW EXTENDED key-in . . . . . . . . . . .714 Utilities merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Index
V View attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .727 background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .728 change portion of design displayed in. . . . . . . . . .78 close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .726 fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .718 magnification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 714 maximize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 minimize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 move. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .724 open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .721 pop-up menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .725 Previous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .723 resize borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .719 save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .730 undo operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .723 update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .713 window area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .716 zoom in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .714 zoom out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .715 View Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727, 729 displayset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 View Control Update View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .713 View Control Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .711 View Control tool box Copy View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .726 Fit View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .718 Pan View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .721 Rotate View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .719 Update View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .713 View Next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .724 View Previous. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .723 Window Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .716 Zoom In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .714 Zoom Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .715 VIEW NEXT key-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .724 VIEW ON key-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .713 VIEW PREVIOUS key-in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .724 W Window Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 716 menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .716 WINDOW AREA EXTENDED key-in . . . . . . . . .717 Window menu Arrange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Windows file selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Windows Explorer drag and drop from. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Working units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 master units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 MU SU PU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648 positional units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646 subunits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647 workmode DWG Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 Workmode change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 V7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 Workspace menu Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 817 Z Zoom factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .714 In. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 714 Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 715 ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .714 ZOOM IN CENTER key-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .715 ZOOM IN EXTENDED key-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .715 ZOOM OUT CENTER key-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .716 ZOOM OUT EXTENDED key-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . .716

Ms Quickstartguide

Uploaded by

Ms Quickstartguide

Uploaded by

MicroStation V8 2004 Edition

MicroStation QuickStart Guide

ii MicroStation QuickStart Guide

About the Documentation

MicroStation BASIC Help MicroStation Visual Basic for Applications Help

MicroStation QuickStart Guide

iv MicroStation QuickStart Guide

10 . The following type styles are used to distinguish various text:

MicroStation QuickStart Guide

vi MicroStation QuickStart Guide

Part I: Getting Started 1. Whats New in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition?

MicroStation QuickStart Guide

2. Whats New in MicroStation V8.1?

MicroStation QuickStart Guide

3. Whats New in MicroStation V8.0?

MicroStation QuickStart Guide

MicroStation QuickStart Guide

Part II: Tutorial 9. Your First Session

MicroStation QuickStart Guide

10. Workflow Basics

xviii MicroStation QuickStart Guide

Whats New in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition?

AutoCAD Interoperability Enhancements

AutoCAD 2004 support

In addition, the 2004 Edition supports the following AutoCAD features:

MicroStation QuickStart Guide

Whats New in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition?

Export DGN, DWG, DXF

DWG/DXF file recovery

MicroStation QuickStart Guide

Whats New in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition?

DWG Open Options

The dialog box also contains these icons:

MicroStation QuickStart Guide

Whats New in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition?

Line Weights category

Save As DWG/DXF Options

The dialog box also contains these icons:

MicroStation QuickStart Guide

Whats New in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition?

MicroStation QuickStart Guide

Whats New in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition?

Line Weights category

Entity Mapping category

MicroStation QuickStart Guide

Whats New in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition?

MicroStation QuickStart Guide

Whats New in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition?

Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box, References tab

MicroStation QuickStart Guide

Whats New in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition?

Save As DWG/DXF Options dialog box, Filter tab

MicroStation QuickStart Guide

Whats New in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition?

To select the PDF printer driver file

Viewing and printing PDF files

Levels and references in PDF files

MicroStation QuickStart Guide

Whats New in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition?

Additional printing enhancements

MicroStation QuickStart Guide

Whats New in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition?

MicroStation QuickStart Guide

Whats New in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition?

Pen table enhancements

MicroStation QuickStart Guide

Whats New in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition?

Batch Print enhancements

MicroStation QuickStart Guide

Whats New in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition?

Pen definition options

xxxxxxpen(pen_number)=(colors, weights, or levels) /GRAYSCALE

TrueType and SHX hardware font mapping

MicroStation QuickStart Guide

Whats New in MicroStation V8 2004 Edition?

Integrated Feature Modeling